语法简说GTP
Grammar Training Program
Contents内容
Unit One Nouns and Pronouns名词和代词
Unit Two Adjectives and Adverbs形容词和副词
Unit Three Articles冠词
Unit Four Prepositions介词
Unit Five Numerals数词
Unit Six Verbs动词
Unit Seven Tenses时态
Unit Eight Infinitive and Gerund动词不定式和动名词 Unit Nine Present Participle and Past Participle现在分词和过去分词 Unit Ten Voice and Mood语态和语气
Unit Eleven Sentences and Patterns (Brief Introduction)句子和句型 Unit Twelve Simple Sentences and Complex Sentences简单句和复合句 Unit Thirteen Collateral Series它类句型(存在句There-be与倒装句) Unit Fourteen Five Patterns and Thirty-eight Variants
五大句型与其三十八种变体
Unit Fifteen Pitfalls To Be Aware of易错陷阱简说
1
2
Unit One Nouns & Pronouns名词和代词
Part one Nouns名词
英语名词可分专有名词和普通名词两大类:
1、专有名词是个别的人、地、物、团体、机构等的专用名称。
专有名词中实词的第一个字母要大写。
如:Beijing, Tom, the People‘s Republic of China(中华人民共和国)
专有名词如果是含有普通名词的短语,则必须使用定冠词the。如:the Great Wall (长城)
姓氏名如果采用复数形式,则表示该姓氏一家人(复数含义),如:the Greens( 格林一家人)。
2、普通名词是许多人或事物的共有名称。如:pupil, family, man, foot,etc.
普通名词又分为可数名词和不可数名词。
Countable Nouns and Uncountable nouns
可数名词指表示的人或事物可以用数来计量，它有单数与复数两种形式。不可数名词指所表示的事物不能用数来计量。物质名词与抽象名词一般无法用数目，来统计，都成为不可数名词。不可数名词前一般不能用冠词a、an来表示数量，没有复数形式。要表示―一个……‖这一概念，就须加a piece of这一类短语。要注意许多名词在汉语里看来是可数名词，在英语里却不可数。如:chalk，paper，bread，rice，grass，news等。
Singular Forms and Plural Forms单数和复数
单数变复数
第一类: 不规则变化
foot ? feet， goose ? geese， tooth---teeth， child ? children， ox ? oxen， louse ? lice， woman ? women， man ? men， mouse ? mice
注意:与 man 和 woman构成的合成词，其复数形式也是 -men 和-women。如: an Englishman，two Englishmen. 但German不是合成词，故复数形式为Germans; Bowman是姓，其复数是the Bowmans。
第二类:单复数同形
sheep, deer, fish, cattle, Chinese, Japanese，audience
但除人民币元、角、分外，美元、英镑、法郎等都有复数形式。如:a dollar, two dollars; a meter, two meters
第三类:以o结尾的单词。
A、有些以o结尾的外来词或缩略词的复数形式只加"s";
B、以元音字母加o结尾的单词只加"s"
例如:piano，photo，zero，radio，bamboo，tobacco，solo，cuckoo，dynamo，cameo，soprano.
如果以o结尾的名词有生命力，则该词汇一般加-es。如:hero，tomato，potato，Negro (黑人) [简记: 黑人英雄吃西红柿马铃薯。]
第四类:以辅音加y结尾的名词变y为i再加"es"，如:family--families ， city--cities
若y前面是元音字母只加"S"，如:key?keys，boy?boys，play?plays，toy?toys 第五类: 以f，fe结尾的名词，变f，fe为v 加es，如:calf--calves， knife--knives A.下列名词直接加"s"
3
roof (房顶) reef (暗礁) chief (首领) cliff (悬崖) grief (悲痛) turf (草皮) belief (信仰) gulf (港湾) dwarf (侏儒) safe (保险箱) sheriff (长官) tariff (关税) B. scarf (头巾) wharf (码头) staff (全体职员) handkerchief (手帕) hoof (蹄)既可直接加"s"，又可变f为v加es。
第六类:复合名词复数形式
1、中间没有连字符的合成名词在词尾变复数;
例如:bookshelf?bookshelves，handful?handfuls
2、man和 woman构成的复合名词，二者均变为复数。
例如:Man servant?men servants woman teacher?women teachers 3、中间有连字符的合成词，在主体词(中心意义的词)末尾变为复数。例如:Sister-in-law-sisters-in-law looker-on--lookers-on editor-in-chief-editors-in-chief
4、下列合成名词在后一个词上变化;
例如:sit-in?sit-ins，grown-up?grown-ups，stand-by?stand-bys
touch-me-not?touch-me-nots, go-between?go-betweens 第七类:集体名词，以单数形式出现，但实为复数
如: people police cattle 等本身就是复数，不能说 a people，a police，a cattle，但可以说a person，a policeman，a head of cattle，the English，the British，the French，the Chinese，the Japanese，the Swiss 等名词，表示国民总称时，作复数用。
如: The Chinese are industrious and brave. 中国人民是勤劳勇敢的。 第八类:以s结尾，仍为单数的名词
1. maths，politics，physics等学科名词，为不可数名词，是单数。
2. news 是不可数名词。
3. the United States，the United Nations 应视为单数。
The United Nations was organized in 1945. 联合国是1945年组建起来的。
4. 以复数形式出现的书名，剧名，报纸，杂志名，也可视为单数。
"The Arabian Nights" is a very interesting story-book.
<<一千零一夜>>是一本非常有趣的故事书。
第九类:表示由两部分构成的东西
如:glasses (眼镜) trousers, clothes
若表达具体数目，要借助数量词 pair(对，双); suit(套); a pair of glasses; two
pairs of trousers
第十类:另外还有一些名词，其复数形式有时可表示特别意思，如:goods货物，waters水域，fishes(各种)鱼
第十一类:外来词.
一些英语外来词的复数形式:crisis?crises 危机，analysis?analyses
分析
定性数据统计分析pdf销售业绩分析模板建筑结构震害分析销售进度分析表京东商城竞争战略分析
，oasis?oases 绿洲，parenthesis?parentheses 括号 ，axis?axes 轴心 ，ellipsis?ellipses 日蚀 ，hypothesis?hypotheses 假定，synopsis?synopses 内容提要 ，erratum?errata 勘误误表，addendum?addenda 补遗、附录， medium?media 媒体
名词复数规则变化的发音规律
清辅音后加-s读[s]，浊辅音和元音后加-s读[z]，[s][z][ d ?][ t ?]之后读[iz]。可以用口诀表达为:
清读[s]，浊元[z];[s][z] [d ? ] [t ?]读[iz]。
4
Cases of Nouns名词的格
1. 名词所有格表示所属关系,相当于物主代词,在句中作定语、宾语或主语等。其构
成法如下:
(1) 表示人或其它有生命的东西的名词常在词尾加‘s。如:Children‘s Day(儿童节), my sister‘s book(我姐姐的书)
(2) 以s或es结尾的复数名词。只在词尾加‘。如:Teachers‘ Day(教师节) (3) 有些表示时间、距离以及世界、国家、城镇等无生命的名词,也可在词尾加‘s. 如:
today‘s newspaper(今天的报纸), ten minutes‘ break(十分钟的课间休息),
China‘s population(中国的人口).
(4) 无论表示有生命还是无生命的东西的名词,一般均可用介词of短语来表示所有关系。如:
a daughter of the Nile (尼罗河的女儿).
[注解]:
? ‘s还可以表示某人的家或者某个店铺,如:my aunt‘s(我阿姨家), the doctor‘s(诊所)
? 两人共有某物时,可以采用 A and B‘s 的形式,如:Lucy and Lily‘s
bedroom(露西和莉莉合住的卧室)
? ―of+名词所有格/名词性物主代词‖,称为双重所有格,如:a friend of my
father‘s(我父亲的一位朋友), a friend of mine(我的一位朋友)
Subject-Predicate Agreement主谓一致
名词或代词作主语时和谓语之间的单复数的一致问题:
1. 谓语和谓语基本保持单复数的一致,即:主语是可数名词单数或不可数名词时,谓
语动词用单数形式:如:
The computer was a great invention.(计算机是个了不起的发明)
The water in the glass is very cold.(玻璃杯里的水很冷)
2. 集体名词(如family, class, team, group, row, police, school等)做句子主语时:
? 如果表示整体概念,则谓语用单数形式,如:
Class Three is a very good class.(三班是好班。)
? 如果表示其中的所有成员时,则谓语用复数形式,如:
Class Three have a map of China.(三班有张中国地图。)
3. Chinese, Japanese, fish, sheep, people等表示单个时谓语用单数,表示许多时,谓语
用复数。
There is a sheep in the yard.(院子里有只绵羊。)
There are some sheep in the yard.(院子里有一些绵羊。)
4. maths, news等虽然有s结尾,但不是复数, 因此谓语仍用单数:The news is very exciting. (这个消息令人兴奋)
5. glasses, shoes, socks, trousers, gloves等名词往往用复数形式,故谓语用复数。 如:The trousers are very cheap and I want to take them.(裤子很便宜,我想买) 6. a lot of 后跟名词复数时谓语用复数形式,跟不可数名词时谓语用单数形式。如:
A lot of students are playing baseball now.(现在有许多学生在打垒球)
A lot of time was wasted on that work.(大量的时间花在了那个工作上)(被动句) 7. and 连接两个名词做主语时,谓语原则上用复数,但是两个名词若构成一个整体事
5
物时,谓语则用单数。如:The teacher and his son are picking apples now.(老师和他的儿子在摘苹果) / Fish and chips is very famous food. (鱼和薯条是一种出名的食品)
8. there be 句型中be的单复数一般由靠近的名词决定。如:
There is a table and four chairs in the room.(房间里有一张桌子和四张椅子) 9. 用both…and…连接两个事物做主语时,谓语一般用复数。如:
Both you and I are required to be here tomorrow.(你和我明天要求都来) 10. 主语中含有with的短语时,谓语单复数由with之前的人物决定。如:
A woman with a 7-year-old child was standing at the side of the road. (一名妇女带着一个七岁的孩子就站在路边)
11. either…or…或者 neither…nor…连接两个人物做句子主语时,谓语采用就近原则。如:
Either you or he is right.(要么是你对,要么是他对。/你和他有一个人是对的)
Neither you nor I am going there.(你和我都不打算去那里) 12. 表示一段时间或长度概念的复数名词做主语时,谓语一般用单数。如:
Two months is not a short time.(两个月不是个短时间)
Two thousand kilometers is quite a long distance(距离).(两千千米是相当长的一段距离)
13. 主语中含有half of… / (three quarters)of… / all (of) the ….等词语时,谓语的单复数由名词确定,如:
Over three quarters of the information on the Internet is in English
.(因特网上四分之三以上的信息是用英语写的)
A third of the students were playing near the lake.( 三分之一的学生 (当时)正在湖边玩耍)
All of the water in these rivers has been polluted.(这些河流中的水已经被污染了)(被动句)
但是, population一词又有特殊情况:
What‘s the population of China?(中国人口是多少,)(句子用单数)
Three quarters of the population in this city are Arabs (阿拉伯人).
(这个城市四分之三的人口是阿拉伯人)(句子用复数)
Double Genitive双重所有格
所谓―双重所有格(double genitive)‖，是指名词所有格或名词性物主代词同of构成的所有格，即―of，名词所有格‖。双重所有格有以下几个特征:
1) ―of，名词所有格‖中的名词必须表示人，不能表示事物。因此，我们可以说:a play of Shakespeare‘s(莎士比亚的一个戏剧)， a friend of my wife‘s(我妻子的一个朋友)，但却不能说a funnel of the ship‘s或 a leg of a table‘s，而且该名词必须是特指的，不能是泛指的。比如我们可以说，a friend of the doctor‘s(这位医生的一个朋友)，a novel of the writer‘s(那位作者的一部小说)，而不能说a friend of a doctor‘s或 a novel of a writer‘s。
2)除了修饰的原因外，用双重所有格主要是由于被修饰词有排他性的限定词(determiner)，如冠词、某些不定代词、指示代词、疑问代词、数词等。比如我们不能说 an our old acquaintance，而必须说an old acquaintance of ours(我们的一个
6
老相识);不能说many their books，正确的说法是 many book of theirs(他们的许多书)。再如:
This demand of theirs is quite ridiculous(他们的这个要求非常可笑。
―This foolish wife of mine thinks I‘m a great artist，‖ said he(―我那愚蠢的老婆以为我是个大艺术家，‖他说道。
3)注意区别下列四种表达方式含义的差别:
one of my brother‘s friends(明确表示我兄弟有一个以上的朋友)
a friend of my brother‘s(暗示我兄弟有一个以上的朋友)
a friend of my brother(对我兄弟有好感的人)
my brother‘s friend(我兄弟唯一的一个朋友或刚谈及的那一个朋友)
A double genitive and a common of-phrase are different constructions with different
shades of meaning.
e.g. He is a friend of my father‘s. (= He is one of my father‘s friends.)
He is a friend of my father. (= He is friendly to my father.)
a criticism of Shaw‘s (= a criticism made by Shaw)
a criticism of Shaw (= a criticism against Shaw)
Part Two Pronouns代词
Types of Pronouns
英语中代词分为: 人称代词、物主代词、反身代词、指示代词、关系代词、疑问代词、连接代词和不定代词等等。
1. Personal Pronoun人称代词
He is a friend of mine.
The book is mine.
My T-shirt is blue. What about your T-shirt?
7
-Mine is blue. –What about yours.
1) 主格用来作句子的主语、表语。如: I often go shopping on Sundays.(星期天我常去购物。) / Are they from Brazil?(他们是巴西人吗,) / Where have they gone?(他们上哪儿去了,) / That‘s it.(就那么回事。) / It‘s he!(是他～)
2) 宾格用来作及物动词或者介词的宾语。如:Who teaches you English this year?(今年谁教你们的英语,) / Help me!(救救我～) / We often write letters to her.(我们常给他写信。)
3) 人称代词作表语或者放在比较状语从句连词than或as之后时,可以用主格形式,也可以用宾格形式,口语中大多用宾格。如:--Who is it?(是谁,) –It‘s I/me.(是我。) 4) 三个不同人称同时出现,或者主语中包含―我‖时,按照―you?he?I‖的顺序表达。
如:
Both he and I are working at that computer company.(我和他都在那家电脑公司上班。)
–Who will go there?(谁要去那儿,)
–You and me.(你和我)
5) 人称代词it除了可以指人指物之外,还可以表示―时间、天气、温度、距离、情况‖
等含义,此外还可以作―非人称代词‖使用,替代作主语或者宾语的不定式、动名词
或者名词性从句。如:—What‘s the weather like today?(今天天气怎样,) 6) —It‘s fine.(天气晴好) / —What‘s the time?(几点啦,) —It‘s 12:00.(12点) / It‘s a
long way to go.(那可要走好长的路) / It took him three days to clean his house.(打
扫屋子花了他三天的时间。) / It is very clear that the public want to know when
these men can go into space.(很显然,公众想知道这些人什么时候能进入太空。) /
We found it very difficult to learn a foreign language well.(我们发觉要学好一门
外语是非常困难的。)
2. Possessive Pronoun物主代词
物主代词:说明事物所属关系的代词,分为形容词性和名词性两种。 1) 形容词性物主代词只能作句子中名词的修饰语,后面要跟名词。如:
Is that your umbrella?(那是你的伞吗,) / I often go to see my grandparents on
Sundays.
(我经常在星期天去看望祖父母。) / They are their books.(是他们的书。) 2)名词性物主代词相当于名词,既代替事物又表明所属关系,在句子中往往独立地作主语、宾语或者表语,后面千万不可以跟名词。如:
This is your cup,but where is mine?(这是你的杯子,可我的在哪儿,)
Your classroom is very big, but ours is rather small.(你们的教室很大,我们的相当小。)
3) ―of + 名词性物主代词‖称为双重所有格,作定语时放在名词的后面。如:
A friend of mine came to see me yesterday.
(我的一个朋友昨天来看我了) (指若干朋友中有一个来看我。) [试比较] My friend came to see me yesterday.(我的朋友昨天来看我了)(指我的那个特定的朋友来看我。)
3. Reflexive Pronoun反身代词
8
反身代词:表示谓语的动作与主语有关或者宾语补足语的动作与宾语有关。 1) 反身代词在句子中作宾语表示反射(指一个动作回到该动作执行者本身。如:
Don‘t play with the knife, you might hurt yourself.(不要玩刀子,那会割伤你的。) 2) 在句子中作同位语表示强调(即用来强调名词或代词的语气)。如:
The story itself is good. Only he didn‘t tell it well.(故事本身是好的,只是他没有讲好。)
4. Demonstrative Pronoun指示代词
指示代词:指示说明近处或者远处、上文或者下文、以前或者现在的人或事物。
单数 复数 含义
this(这个) these(这些) 指较近的人和物
that(那个) those(那些) 指较远的人和物
such (这样的人/物) 指上文提过的人和物
same (同样的人/物) 指和上文提过的相同的人和物
it (这人/这物) 指不太清楚是谁或者是什么时
指示代词既可以单独使用做句子的主语、宾语或表语,也可以作定语修饰名词。如:
What‘s this? (这是什么,) / That model plane is made of plastic.
被动句) (那只模型飞机是塑料做的。)(
Remember never to do such things.(记得永远不要做这样的事情。)
Do the same as the teacher tells you. (按老师说的做)
—Who is it? (是谁,) —It‘s me! (是我～)
1) this和these一般用来指在时间或空间上较近的事物或人，that和those 则指时间和空间上较远的事物或人，例如:This is … and that is …(We are busy these days .
In those days the workers had a hard time(
2. 有时that和those指前面讲到过的事物，this 和these则是指下面将要讲到的事物，例如:I had a cold. That‘s why I didn?t come.例如:
What I want to say is this: pronunciation is very important in learning English( 3. 有时为了避免重复提到的名词，常可用that或those代替，例如:
Television sets made in Beijing are just as good as those made in Shanghai( 4. this 在电话用语中代表自己，that 则代表对方。例如:Hello～ This is Mary. Is that
Jack speaking,
5. Interrogative Pronoun
用来提出问题的代词称为疑问代词。
1) who、whom、whose、what、which、whoever、whatever、whichever主要用于特殊疑问句中,一般放在句首。口语中也常用who代替whom作宾语,但在介词后则只能用whom。如:
Who(m) did you invite to your birthday party?(你都邀请了谁参加你的生日聚会的,)
What does she want to be when she grows up?(她长大了想干什么,) 2) who 和whom只能独立使用,其中who可以作句子的主语、表语或动词的宾语,whom只能作谓语动词的宾语;而what、which、whose等既可以独立使用作主语、表语和宾语,也可以与名词构成疑问短语。如:
9
Who is that man?(那男的是谁,) / What color are their hats?(他们的帽子是什么
颜色,) / Which car was made in Germany?(哪辆车是德国造的,)(被动句) 注意这个提问:
The man in the car is my father.(车里的男人是我父亲。)
?Which man is your father?(哪个男人是你的父亲,)
3) which除了可以询问指代的情况之外,还可以针对说明人物的时间、地点、岁数、颜色、大小、状况等进行提问。如:
People there live a very sad life.(那里的人生活凄惨。)
?Which people live a sad life? (哪些人生活凄惨,)
—Which hotel have you booked for your holiday?(为了度假你预订了哪家旅馆,)
—The biggest one in Shanghai.(上海最大的那家旅馆)
4) 疑问代词不分单复数,视它所替代的人或事物决定单复数,但是通常用单数;如果修饰名词,则以名词的单复数为准。如:Who is (are) in that playhouse?(谁在游戏房里,) / What is that? (那是什么,)/ What are those? (那些是什么,) / What colors do they
have?(它们有哪些颜色,)
6. Relative Pronoun关系代词
关系代词:用来引导定语从句的代词叫关系代词,参见后面的定语从句。 1) 关系代词who 、which、 that 、whom 等,将定语从句和主句连接起来。英语中
另一方面又起连接作用。如: 的关系代词一方面在从句中担任一定的成分,
The student who is drawing a picture is in Grade One.(正在画画的学生是一年级
的。)
The student who is in Grade One
The student who is drawing a picture is in Grade One.
.
.
2) 关系代词who / whom指人,如果作从句的宾语,则有时省略。如:
Do you know the man who is wearing a red hat? (你认识那个戴着红帽子的男人吗,)
3) 关系代词which 指物,如果作从句的宾语,则有时省略。如:
Have you found the book which you lost several days ago?(你找到几天前丢失的那本书了吗,)
4) 关系代词that既可指人也可指物,如果作从句的宾语,则有时省略。如:
Can you see the man that is running along the river bank ?(你看得见顺着河跑的那个男人吗,)
7. Indefinite Pronoun不定代词
不定代词:代替或修饰不特指的人或事物的代词叫不定代词。
1) some和 any 的用法:
some一般用于肯定句中,意思是―几个‖、―一些‖、―某个‖作定语时可修饰可数名词或不可数名词。如:I have some work to do today. (今天我有些事情要做。)/ They will go there some day.(他们有朝一日会去那儿。)
some用于疑问句时,表示建议、请求或希望得到肯定回答。如:Would you like
some coffee with sugar?(你要加糖的咖啡吗,)
10
any一般用于疑问句或否定句中,意思是―任何一些‖、―任何一个‖,作定语时可修饰可数或不可数名词。如:
They didn‘t have any friends here. (他们在这里没有朋友。)
Have you got any questions to ask?(你有问题要问吗,)
any用于肯定句时,意思是―任何的‖。Come here with any friend.(随便带什么朋友来吧。)
2) no和none的用法:
no是形容词,只能作定语表示,意思是―没有‖,修饰可数名词(单数或复数)或不可数名词。如:There is no time left. Please hurry up.(没有时间了,请快点) / They had no reading books to lend.(他们没有阅读用书可以出借)
none只能独立使用,在句子中可作主语、宾语和表语,意思是―没有一个人(或事物)‖,表示复数或单数。如:None of them is/are in the classroom.(他们当中没有一个在教室里。) / I have many books, but none is interesting.(我有很多的书,但没有一本是有趣的。)
3) all和both的用法:
all指三者或三者以上的人或物,用来代替或修饰可数名词;也可用来代替或修饰不可数名词。
both指两个人或物,用来代替或修饰可数名词。all和both在句子中作主语、宾语、表语、定语等。如:
I know all of the four British students in their school.(他们学校里四个英国学生
我全认识。) —Would you like this one or that one? —Both.(你要这个还是那
个,两个都要。)
all和both既可以修饰名词(all/both+(the)+名词),也可以独立使用,采用―all/both + of the +名词(复数)‖的形式,其中的of 可以省略。如:All (of) (the) boys are
naughty.(是男孩都调皮。)
4) every和each用法:
every是形容词,只能作定语修饰单数名词,意思是―每一个‖,表示整体概念;
each是形容词、代词,可用作主语、宾语、定语等,意思是―每个‖或者―各个‖,表示单个概念;each可以放在名词前,可以后跟of短语,与动词同时出现时要放在―be动词、助动词、情态动词‖之后或者行为动词之前
every和each都用作单数理解,但是下文中既可以用单数的代词(如he/him/his)也可以用复数的代词(如they/them/their)替代。如:Every one of the students in his class
studies very hard.(他班上每个学生学习都很用功。) / They are very busy. Each of them has something to do.(他们很忙, 人人都有事干。)
5) either和neither的用法:
either意思是―两个中间的任何一个‖;neither是either的否定形式,意思是―两个都不‖。
neither和either在句子中可作主语、宾语和定语等,都用作单数。如:
I don‘t care much for what to drink. Either of the two will do. (我不介意喝些什么,两个之中随便哪个都行。)
—Will you go there by bus or by car?
—Neither. I will go there by train.(你坐公车去还是坐轿车去,一个都不坐,我坐火车去。)
6) other、the other和another的用法:
11
other意思是―另一‖、―另一些‖,有复数形式。在句子中可作主语、宾语和定语。another意思是―另外‖、―又一个‖,表示增加,在句中可作宾语和定语。如:
Some girls are singing under the big apple tree and others are sitting on the grass
talking.
(有些女孩在大苹果树下唱歌,别的就坐在草地上说话。)
You have had several cakes. Do you really want another one?
(你已经吃了好几块饼子了,你真的还要一块,)
I want another four books.(我还要四本书。)
another(另外的,再一,又一)与the other(另外的一个) 主要从数量上区分,只有两个时用the other,在原先基础上增加用another。如: This is one of your socks. Where
is the other one?(这是你的一只袜子,还有一只呢,) / I have eaten four cakes, but I
still want another.(我已经吃了四块蛋糕,但是我还想要块。)
others与the others的主要区别:
others指―剩余的人/物‖(指大部分);the others指―其余的人/物‖,(指全部)。如:
A few students are playing soccer while others are watching them.
(有几个学生在踢足球,其他一些人在观看。)
Two of the ten boys are standing and the others are sitting round them.
(十个男孩中有两个站着,其他人都围着他们坐着。)
7)many和much的用法:
很多‖,与可数名词复数连用;much意思是―很多‖,与不可数名词连many意思是―
用。它们在句中可作主语、宾语和定语等。如:I don‘t have many friends here.(在这里我没有很多的朋友。) /Many died in the bus accident.(许多人在公交车祸中丧失。) / We can learn much with the help of him.(在他的帮助之下我们能学到很多)
many和much一般用于否定句,肯定句中通常用a lot of 或者lots of; many / much用于肯定句时可以在前面加上so、very或too.如:
There are a lot of people on the playground.(操场上有许多的人。)
They haven‘t got much work to do.(他们没有多少事情可做。)
There are too many people in the room.(房间里人太多了。)
8) few、little、a few、a little的用法:
few、little意思是―很少几个‖、―几乎没有‖,有否定的意思,a few、a little意思是―有几个‖、―有些‖,有肯定的意思 ;few、a few与可数名词连用或代替可数的事物, little、a little与不可数名词连用或代替不可数的事物。它们在句中可作主语、宾语和定语。如:
He is very poor and he has little money.(他很穷,几乎没有什么钱。) / Don‘t worry. There is still a little time left.(别着急,还有一点儿时间呢。) / In that polar region there
live few people.(在那个极地地区几乎不住人) / You can get a few sweets from him.(你可以从他那儿弄到一些糖果。)
9) 复合不定代词somebody ,something ,anything, nothing ,everything, everybody等是由some , any ,no ,every, 加上body, thing 构成的,做复合不定代词,在句子中当单数使用。
somebody, something, someone 一般用于肯定句中;anything, anybody,anyone一般用于疑问句、否定句和条件状语从句中。修饰复合不定代词的定语,应放在它们的后面。如:
Hey, Lily. There is someone outside the door.(嗨, 莉莉, 门外有人。)
12
Did (每个人) you meet anyone when you came to school last Sunday?
(上个星期天你来学校时见到什么人了吗,)
He has nothing much to do today.(他今天没有多少事情做。) 10) one与ones用来代替上文的一个或多个人或事物,前面可以加冠词、形容词、指
示代词等。
如:
Which jacket would you like, this one or that one?(你要哪件夹克,这件还是那件,)
I don‘t like the green ones.(我不喜欢绿色的那些。)
11) so可以代替一件事情,作句子的宾语或表语。如:
I don‘t think so.(我认为不是这样的。)
He lost a book. So did I.(他丢失了一本书,我也是。)
12) a lot of、lots of、a number of (large numbers of)、a great deal of、plenty of的
区别:
五个―名词+介词‖短语都表示―大量,许多‖:
a lot of (或lots of) 既可以修饰不可数名词也可以修饰可数名词的复数形式,可以相应地换为much和many;
plenty of ―足够、大量‖, 既可以修饰不可数名词也可以修饰可数名词的复数形式。
a number of / large numbers of只可以修饰可数名词复数形式(它修饰的词作主语时谓语用复数形式)可以换为some、many、a lot of、plenty of。
a great deal of只可修饰不可数名词(它修饰的词作主语时谓语用单数形式)可换
为much。如:A lot of people think that time is money.(许多的人认为时间就是金
钱。)
I don‘t have to do it in a hurry because I have plenty of time.
(我用不着赶忙,因为我有充足的时间。)
I have a number of letters to write today.(今天我有好多信要写。)
I spend a great deal of time/money on shopping.(在购物方面我花费了大量的时间/
金钱。)
13) none、no one、nobody的区别:
no one和nobody都表示―没有人‖, 仅指人, 后面不跟of 短语, 作主语时谓语用单数形式;none表示―没有一个人/物‖,可指人也可以指物,后面可跟of短语,作主语时谓语可用单数也可用复数。如:
No one knows how he managed to get the ticket.(没有人知道他是怎样搞到那张票的。)
Nobody handed in his/their composition(s) yesterday.(昨天没有一个人交作文。)
None of my friends came to see me that day.(那天没有一个朋友来看我。) 注:复合不定代词有12个:something(某事), someone(某人), somebody(某人), anything(任何事), anyone(任何人), anybody(任何人), nothing(没事),nobody(没有人), no one(没有人), everything(一切), everyone(每个人), everybody(每个人)
Close Contact with Examination:(试题直击)
名词部分
[例1](1)—How far is your school from here?
13
—Not very far. It's about twenty ______ walk.
A. minute's B. minutes‘ C. minutes D. minute
(2)It is about ______ from the school to my home.
A. ten minutes walk B. ten minutes‘ walk C. ten minutes‘ s walk D. ten minute‘s walk
分析: 上述两题考查名词所有格的构成及用法。由句意可知空格处所填内容是表示距
离的名词，选项中的名词minute和walk存在所有关系，因此必须用名词的所有格。
名词所有格的‘s也可以加在一个短语之后，若该短语最后一个名词的词尾是-s，则只
加―‘‘。如:an hour‘s ride, two weeks‘ time。因而(1)、(2)小题答案均为B。
[例2] Have you seen ______at the foot of the hill?
A. any sheep B. some sheeps C. any sheeps D. some sheep
分析: 此题考查名词复数的特殊例子。sheep的单复数同形;any一般用在疑问句和
否定句里，some用在肯定句里。答案为A
[例3] —Who is the man in the blue car?
—He is ______father.
A. Kate's and Mary's B. Kate and Mary's C. Kate and Mary D. of Kate
and Mary
分析: 本题考查名词所有格的构成及方法。两个并列的所有格，只给第二个名词加
―‘s‖。
[例4] (哈尔滨市，2003)---Where is Tom,
—He‘ s left a_____saying that he has something important to do.
A. excuse B. message C. exercise D. news 分析: 此题考查名词的用法，由a知道选项A、C、D不行，故选B。答案 选B
解后反思: an excuse(一个借口)，an exercise(一个练习)……，news(新闻)是
不可数名词。
[例5](天津市，2003)He had something to write down and asked me for______.
A. a paper B. some papers C. some pieces of papers D. a piece of
paper
分析: 此题考查不可数名词的用法。Paper作―纸‖讲时是不可数名词，故A、B、C
可排除。
答案:选D
解后反思: paper当―试卷‖、―文件‖讲时是可数名词。类似的词还有:fish，chicken
等。
[例6] China joined the ____ in 2001.
A. CCTV B. WTO C. PLA D. NBA
解析:本题考查学生对国家大事的关心程度，激发学生的爱国主义热情。中国在2001
年缴入了世界贸易组织(WTO)。CCTV(中央电视台)，PLA (中国人民解放军)，
NBA(美国职业篮球联赛)都不符合题意。答案 B
[例7] The man with thick glasses is _____ Chinese teacher.
A. Tom and Carl B. Tom or Carl C. Tom and Carl‘s D. Tom‘s and Carl‘s
解析:本题中的戴着深度眼镜的人是Tom和Carl 两个人的老师，所以要用Tom and
Carl‘s的形式。Tom‘s and Carl‘s表示的是它们各有其师的意思，不是指一个人，而
是两个人。答案:C
[例8] The market isn't far from here. It‘s only______ bicycle ride.
14
A. half an hours‘ B. half an hour's C. half an hour D. an hour and a
half
解析:―……长时间的路程‖的表达形式是―……时间+ ‘s‖，如果时间的后面有s，就
只加‘。如:two hours‘ walk步行两个小时的路程。
代词部分
[例1] 用所给词的适当形式填空。
1)This isn‘t _______ (I) book, it must be _______ (you).
2)Is there any milk in the bottle? Yes, there is ______ (little).
分析: 第1小题第一空要用形容词性物主代词my，用于修饰名词book，第二空则要
用名词性物主代词yours，相当于your book。第2小题应用a little表示肯定:―有
一点儿‖。
[例2] There are many trees on________ of the road.
A. both side B. each sides C. both sides D. every side 分析: 此题主要考查不定代词both, each和every的用法。both为―两者‖(都)‖，
作定语时，其后接复数名词;做主语时，要用复数谓语动词。either为―两者中间的
任何一个(的)‖，作定语时，后接单数可数名词;做主语时，要用单数谓语动词。
every意为―每个(的)‖，作定语，只用于三者或三者以上。又因马路road(drive, street, thoroughfare等)都有两侧，所以正确答案只能是C。
[例3] 1) ―Help ______ to some moon cakes‖, Han Meimei said to the twins.
A. you B. oneself C. yourself D. yourselves
2) —Put on your clothes when you go out.
—Thank you. Mum. I can look after______.
A. me B. I C. ourselves D. myself 分析 这是一组考查反身代词用法的试题。反身代词在句中可作宾语、表语和同位语，
不能单独使用、不能替代主格代词，但可用在主格代词后以加强语气。还常用于某
些短语中，如:by oneself独自，enjoy oneself 玩得愉快，teach oneself 自学，help
oneself to…随便吃(用)……等。因此上二题答案均为D。
[例4](广东省，2003)There is_____with my computer. It doesn‘t work.
A. nothing wrong B. anything wrong C. wrong something D.
something wrong
分析:本题考查形容词与不定代词的位置关系，形容词修饰不定代词应放在不定代
词之后，而anything用于否定句和疑问句，由It doesn‘t work知答案选D。
解后反思: 考虑词的使用范围并结合语境是解决本题的关键。
[例5] Who taught them French? — ______. They learnt it all by themselves.
A. Somebody B. Anybody C. Everybody D. Nobody 解析: 根据答语They learnt it all by themselves.可以知道:没有人教他们法语，显然
答案选D。
[例6] Does______matter if he can‘t finish the job on time?
A. this B. it C. that D. he
解析: 这个句子少了主语，if he can't finish the job on time是句子的真正主语，it是
形式主语, 由此可知答案选B。
[例7]The old woman kept one black dog and two white______.
A. one B. ones C. those D. one‘s
15
解析: 为了避免重复前面所提到的名词，后面通常用代词来代替。本句前面提到的名词dog是可数名词，前面有形容词white修饰，所以用代词one来代替dog。另外，这里有数词two，所以是复数形式，用ones，可知答案为B。
[例8]Mr. White didn't teach______English last term. Their English teacher was Miss
Gao.
A. their B. theirs C. them D. themselves
解析: 本句是teach接双宾语的结构。English是直接宾语，宾格代词them是间接宾语，故答案选C。
[例9] Help______to some fruits, children.
A. you B. yours C. yourselves D. yourself
解析: help yourself,yourselves to sth. 是固定搭配。意为―随便吃点什么‖。后面的children决定了yourselves的复数形式，故答案选C。
[例10] —______do you prefer, dumplings or noodles? —Neither. I like rice.
A. Who B. What C. Which D. Where 解析: 表示选择要用疑问代词which，故答案选C。
Unit Two Adjectives and Adverbs形容词和副词
Part one Adjective 形容词
Definition:定义
用来说明或修饰名词、代词的词称为形容词。
Adjective and Its Particular Usages :形容词的具体用法:
1(形容词的用法和位置
1) 形容词作表语，表明主语的性质和特征，放在连系动词之后。如:
Computers are very useful in our everyday life(
Leaves turn yellow in autumn(
2) 形容词作定语，修饰名词或不定代词，通常放在名词之前，不定代词之后。如:
This is an unhealthy diet(
There is nothing important in today‘s newspaper(
3) 形容词作宾语补足语，放在宾语之后，与其构成复合宾语。如:
You should keep your classroom clean and tidy(
I found it difficult to get on well with the manager(
4) 用作状语
He arrived home, hungry and tired. 他回到家里，又饿又累。
I went there full of joy. 我兴高采烈地去了那儿。
He sat in the corner, silent. 他坐在角落里，一言不发。
形容词用作状语主要表示原因、结果或伴随等，其逻辑主语必须与句子主语保持一致。这类结构通常可用从句或并列句来改写:
He came over, eager to help. / He came over and (he) was eager to help. 他走过来，急于想帮忙。
注:以上形容词用作状语的情形，有人也称之为主语补足语，因为它们是补充说明主语的。另外，还有一类特殊的形容词用作状语:
The stove was red hot. 火炉是炽热的。
It‘s boiling hot. 它是滚烫的。
16
His face went bright red. 他的脸变得通红。
The weather is freezing [icy, bitter] cold. 天气冷极了。
其中的red, boiling, bright, freezing, icy, bitter 等的实际意义相当于very，起加强语气的作用，并且其用法也很有限，如可说 bitter cold(冰冷)，bitter wind(寒风)等，但习惯上却不讲bitter hot(炽热)，bitter busy(极忙)等。
5) 用作独立成分
Strange to say, this passed without comment. 说来奇怪，这件事竟没人谈起，就这么过去了。
Sure enough, he got angry at the news. 果然，他对这个消息很生气。
Worse still, we got lost in the dark. 更糟的是，我们在黑暗中又迷路了。
2. 多个形容词作定语时的排序:
顺序为大致遵循以下原则:
描绘形容词—大小(长短高低)形容词—形状形容词—年龄(新旧)形容词—颜色形容词—国籍形容词—材料形容词—用途(类别)形容词—名词，例如:
I bought a nice(好看的) small(小小的) round(圆形的) new(新的) yellow(黄色的) French (法国产的) oak(橡木做的) writing desk(写字台).
a small round table一张小圆桌
a tall white building一幢高大的白色建筑物
a dirty old black shirt一件又脏又旧的黑色衬衣
a famous American medical school一个非常著名的美国医学院 但是，以上情况并不绝对，例外的情况是常有的，况且以上规则也不好记。下面再介绍几条原则性的东西，供参考:
1) 总体描述在前，具体描述在后;
2) 主观描述在前，客观描述在后;
3) 普遍性描述在前，特殊性描述在后;
4) 音节少的词在前，音节多的词在后;
5) 与所修饰的名词关系不紧密的在前，关系紧密的在后。
注:有时，两个互补的形容词修饰同一个名词或代词，在强调全部范围时，可用and / or连起来(例如:
old and young, long or short, male and female)放在名词或代词的后面，并且名词与形容词之间常用逗号隔开。例如:
Visitors, old and young, were delighted. 不管老少，所有的参观者都很高兴。 3. 形容词作后置定语:
1) 形容词短语作定语
I know an actor suitable for the part. 我认识一个适合扮演这个角色的演员。
A man so difficult to please must be hard to work with. 一个如此难以取悦的人一定不好共事。
2) 表语形容词作定语:
He spoke like a man afraid. 他说话时像是很害怕似的。
The house ablaze is next door to me. 那家着火的房子就在我隔壁。 3) 形容词修饰不定代词:
I would like to have something interesting to read. 我想找些有趣的东西来读。
Anyone intelligent can do it. 任何有头脑的人都能做这件事。
17
注:在以下情况，用作定语的形容词可以后置，也可以前置:
? 以-able和-ible结尾的形容词:可置于前有最高级形容词或only等词的名词之后，如:
That is the only solution possible. 那是唯一可行的解决办法。
Please put your idea into the simplest language possible. 请用最简单的语言将你的想法说出来。
?某些成对的形容词:
Everyone, rich and poor, is born equal. 无论贫富，人生来都是平等的。
There was a huge cupboard, simple and beautiful. 有一个大食橱，简朴而美观。 ?形容词enough
Is there enough time to get a snack? 有足够的时间让我们吃点东西吗,
We didn‘t have time enough to finish the work. 我们当时没有足够的时间完成那件工作。
4. the+ 形容词:
1) 表示性质或特征相同的人，具有复数意义:
The rich are not always happier than the poor. 富人并不一定总比穷人幸福。 类例:
the deaf 聋人 the dead 死者 the blind 盲人
the young 年轻人 the weak 弱者 the old 老人
the sick 病人 the wounded 伤员 the strong 强者
the killed 被杀者 the injured 受伤者 the living 活着的人
the unemployed 失业者 the oppressed被压迫者 the oppressing 压迫者 2) 指抽象概念，表示单数意义:
The true always triumphs. 真理永远获胜。
类例:
the good 善良 the right 正义 the true 真实
the bad 坏事 the humorous 幽默感 等
有时可能根据其含义的不同，用法也会有所变化。如the good 既可表示抽象意义(=what is good)，具有单数意义，也可表示人的类别(=those who are good)，具有复数意义。
又如以下两例中的the old:
The old are respected in our country. 在我国老年人受到尊重。
The new is sure to replace the old. 新的东西肯定会代替旧的东西。
Adjective and Its Degrees形容词的级
形容词有原级，比较级和最高级三种形式。
构成比较级和最高级的方法有:
1.在原级后加上-er构成比较级，加上-est构成最高级。如:
原级 比较级 最高级
long(长) longer(更长) longest (最长)
tall (高) taller(更高) tallest (最高)
2.如果原级的最后一个字母以-e结尾，只要加上-r构成比较级，加上-st构成最高级。 原级 比较级 最高级
18
brave(勇敢) braver (更勇敢) bravest(最勇敢)
large(大) larger(更大) largest(最大)
3.有些以重读闭音节结尾的形容词在原级的最后一个字要双写。如: 原级 比较级 最高级
hot(热) hotter(更热) hottest(最热)
big(大) bigger(更大) biggest(最大)
4.以辅音字母-y结尾的形容词，构成比较级和最高级时，一般要把y改成i，再加上-er和-est。如:
原级 比较级 最高级
early(早) earlier(更早) earliest(最早)
happy(高兴) happier(更高兴) happiest(最高兴)
5.多音节和部分双音节的形容词要加上more或most来构成比较级和最高级。如: 原级 比较级 最高级 important(重要) more important(更重要) most important(最重要) beautiful(漂亮) more beautiful(更漂亮) most beautiful(最漂亮) 6.有些形容词是不规则的，这种变化要逐个记住。如:
原级 比较级 最高级
good(好) better(更好) best(最好)
bad(坏) worse(更坏) worst(最坏)
Part Two Adverb副词
Definition:定义
用来说明事情发生的时间、地点、原因、方式等含义或说明其它形容词或副词程度的词叫做副词。
Types of Adverb副词的种类
频度副地点/方位副方式副疑问/连接副时 间 副 词 程度副词 其他副词 词 词 词 词 today, tomorrow, once, here, there, very, too, well, how, too, also,
home, yesterday, now, twice, enough, hard, where, nor, so, below,
rather, then, early, late, always, anywhere, alone, when, as, on,off, quite,
above, once, soon, just, usually, how, so, fast, why, either, outside,
in, inside, much, togethertonight, long, often, whether yes, no, out, just, ,
already, yet, sometiback, up, nearly, suddenl关系副词 maybe, before, mes, down, only y,
ago, later, ever away, off, almost, never, -ly结尾 where, perhaps, since far, hardly,
(seldomnear, as long asafter, whenever 的副词 why, how certainly, ), nearby, 等,
first, someday, ever, wherever even, all, when,
19
a little, a sometime, last, everywhere, bit
Adverb and Its Particular usages:副词的
1) 作状语:
? 时间副词:一般放在句首或句尾,注意,early、late、before、later、yet等一般放在句尾,already、just一般放在动词的前面。如:
We will visit the Great Wall tomorrow.(我们明天要去参观长城。)
They have already been to the UK twice.(他们去过英王国两次。)
Soon the lost boy found his way back home.(不久迷路的孩子找到了回家的路。) ? 频度副词:一般放在be动词之后或者助动词与主要动词之间,但sometimes、often等还可以放在句首或句尾,usually可放在句首,once可放在句尾,twice、three times等一般放在句尾。如: Sometimes I get up early.(我有时起得早。)The workers usually have lunch at the factory.(工人们通常在厂里吃午饭。) / Take this medicine
twice a day.(这种药一天吃两次。.)
? 方式副词:一般放在行为动之后,suddenly可以放在句首、句尾或动词之前。如:
Old people can hardly walk as quickly as young people.(老年人几乎不可能走得
和年轻人一样快。)
Suddenly he saw a light in the dark cave(山洞).(突然,在黑黢黢的山洞里,他看见
了一丝亮光。)
? 地点副词:表示地点的副词和表示位置关系的副词统称为地点副词。 表示地点的:here, there, home, upstairs, downstairs, anywhere, everywhere,
nowhere, somewhere, abroad, elsewhere等
表示位置关系的:above, below, down, up, out, in, across, back, along, over,
round, around, away, near, off, on, inside, outside, past等。
地点副词一般放在句尾,但here、there还可放在句首。如:
There you can see thousands of bikes running in all directions(方向).
(在那里,你可以看到成千上万的自行车朝各个方向流动。)
The frightened wolf ran away.(受到惊吓的狼逃开了。)
He walked out quietly and turned back soon.(他悄悄地走了出去,很快又返回。) ? 程度副词:修饰动词时,放在动词之前;修饰形容词或副词时,放在形容词或副词之前。但注意,enough总是放在被修饰的形容词或动词的后面;only位置比较灵活,总是放在被修饰的词的前面。如:
I nearly forgot all about it if he did not tell me again.(如果他不再次告诉我,我几乎
把那事全忘了。) It was so strange that I could hardly believe my ears.(它那么奇
怪一直我都不能相信我的耳朵。) / She got to the station early enough to catch the
first bus.(她早早地赶到车站赶上了首班车。)
? 疑问副词:用于对句子的状语进行提问,位置总是在句首。如:
When and where were you born?(你何时何地出生,)
Why did little Edison sit on some eggs?(小爱迪生为什么要坐在鸡蛋上,)
How do you do?(你好～)
? 连接副词:用来引导主语从句、宾语从句和表语从句,在从句中作状语。例如:
How I am going to fill this afternoon is still a question.(这个下午我怎样打发还是个问题。)
20
That is why everyone is afraid of tigers.(那就是人人都害怕老虎的原因。)
He wondered how he could do that the next day.(他不知道第二天怎样做那事。) ? 关系副词:用来引导定语从句,在从句中作状语。如:
This is the place where Mr Zhang once lived.(这就是张先生曾经住过的地方。)
Please tell me the way how you have learned English so well.(请告诉我你的英语是怎样学得这么好的方法.)
? 其它副词:too―也‖,用在句尾;also放在动词前;either ―也不‖,放在句尾;nor―也不‖,放在句首;so―如此,这样‖,放在形容词、副词前;on/off―开/关‖放在动词之后;not放在be之后、助动词之后、不定式或动名词之前;maybe/perhaps放在句首;certainly放在句首或动词之前。如:
He went to the Palace Museum and I went there, too.(他去了故宫博物院,我也去了。)
Maybe your ticket is in your inside pocket.(也许你的票就在你的里边衣袋里。)
—Tom doesn‘t have a computer. —Nor do I.(汤姆没有计算机,我也没有。) 2)作表语:地点副词一般可以作表语,放在be等连系动词之后,说明人物所处的位置。如:
I‘m very sorry he isn‘t in at the moment.(很抱歉,他此刻不在家。)
I have been away from my hometown for nearly 20 years.(我离开家乡有将近20年了。)
there.(吉姆就在那边。) Jim is over
3)作定语:时间副词(如now、then)以及许多地点副词都可以作名词的定语,放在名词
的后面。如:People now often have their festival dinners at restaurants.(现在的人
们常在餐馆里吃节日晚宴。) The women there used to veil their faces in public.
(那里的妇女过去在公共场合通常戴面纱。)
4)作宾语补足语:地点副词一般可以作宾语补足语。如:
Put your dirty socks away, Jim! They are giving out bad smell!
(吉姆,把你的脏袜子拿开～它们在散发着臭气。)
Father kept him in and doing his lessons.(父亲把他关在家里做作业) [注意] ―动词+副词‖的宾语如果是代词,则该副词应该放在代词之后。如:He wrote down the word.(他写下了那个词。)?He wrote it down.(他把它写了下来。) Degrees of Adverb
1. 副词有原级、比较级和最高级三级。
原级变为比较级和最高级有规则变化和不规则变化两种。
2. 规则变化:
(1)单音节和部分双音节形容词和副词,在原级的后面加上er,est构成比较级和最高级。 a)直接加er,est :
b)以重读闭音节结尾的,要双写最后一个辅音字母,后加er,est:
c)以辅音字母+y结尾的,先把y改为i再加上er,est:
(2)两个音节或两个以上的音节的,在原级前加more / most. 3. 不规则变化:
原级 比较级 最高级
well好;(身体)好的, better更好的 best 最好的
bad,badly糟糕的,糟糕地 worse更糟糕的,更糟糕worst最糟糕的,最糟糕
地;(身体)更不舒服的 地;(身体)最不舒服的 ill(身体)不舒服的
21
many许多的(可数)
more更多的;更 most最多的;最 much许多的(不可数);非
常
little少的 less更少的 least最少的
farther更远的;更远地 farthest最远的;最远地 far远的;远地 further进一步的(地) furthest最深刻的(地)
4. 形容词和副词的原级、比较级和最高级的用法:
(1)讲述某人/物自身的情况时,用原级。基本句型是:
主语(sb./sth) + 谓语动词 + (very/too/so/quite/rather…) + 形容词/副词原级 +…. 如:He is very old now.(他现在很老了)
They ran quite fast. (它们跑得相当快)
The weather looks rather bad.(天气看上去相当糟)
I am so happy!(我是如此的快乐)
表示两者之间没有差别时,使用句型:
主语(第一个人物) + 谓语动词 + as + 形容词/副词原级 + as + 第二个人物 +…. 如:He is as excited as his younger sister.(他和他妹妹一样兴奋)
slowly as an old lady. Lily rode her bike as
(莉莉骑车像老太太一样慢)
They picked as many apples as the farmers (did). (他们摘的苹果和农民一样多)
表示第一个人比不上第二个人时,使用句型:
主语(第一个人物) + 谓语动词(否定式) + as / so + 形容词/副词原级 + as + 第二个人物+….
如:He is not so / as excited as his younger sister. (他没他妹妹那么兴奋)
Lily did not ride her bike so / as slowly as an old lady. (莉莉骑车不像老太太那样慢)
They didn‘t pick so / as many apples as the farmers (did).
(他们摘的苹果不如农民多)
(2) 讲述两者有差异,第一个人物超过第二个人物时,用比较级。基本句型: 主语(?A‘)+谓语动词+(much/a little/even/still)+形容词/副词比较级+than+第二个人物(?B‘)+….
如:A modern train is much faster than a car.
(现代的火车比轿车快多了)
This book didn‘t cost me more than that one.
(这本书花费我的钱不比那本多)
讲述两者有差异,第一个人物不及第二个人物时,用比较级。句型是:
22
主语(?A‘) + 谓语动词 + less+ (多音节形/副)比较级 + than + 第二个人物(?B‘) +…. 如:I think English is less difficult than maths.
(我认为英语不比数学难。)
Do you think it less important to learn a foreign language?
(你认为学外语不那么重要吗,)
(3)讲述某人/物是一群之中最突出的一个时,用最高级。句型是:
主语(sb./sth) + 谓语动词 +(the) +形容词/副词最高级 +in / of ….
如:The Changjiang River is the longest in China.
(长江是中国最长的河流)
He jumped (the) highest of the three (boys). (三个男生中他跳得最高)
Points for Attention
关于比较等级的重要注释:
1. 以上六个句型中,如果动词是及物或不及物动词,则后面用副词;如果后面是连系动词,则后面用形容词。如:This car is the fastest of the four.(形容词)(这辆汽车是四辆之中最快的)/ This car runs (the) fastest of the four.(副词)(这辆汽车是四辆之中跑得最快的)
2. ―比较级+and+比较级‖表示―越来越……‖。如:The weather is getting warmer and
warmer.(天越来越温暖了)
3. ―the+比较级…,the+比较级…‖表示―越…就越…‖。如:The more trees we plant,
the better it will be.(我们栽的树越多,情况就会越好)/ The harder you try, the greater your progress is.(你越是努力,进步就越大)
4. 一般的形容词或副词的比较级前面可以加much/a little/even/still,而表示数量的more之前还可以加some/ any/ no/ one/ two/ many/ several/ a lot等词。如:It is much colder today than yesterday.(今天比昨天冷多了)/ Would you like some more coffee?(你还要些咖啡吗,)/He did not eat any more.(他没有再吃) 5. more than / less than分别可以理解为―多于/少于‖,相当于副词,more than=over;
less than=under.如:I lived in New York for more than four months.(我在纽约生活了四个多月)
6. ―one of the +最高级+名词(复数)‖整个短语为单数含义,谓语要用单数形式。如:One of the oldest houses has been burnt in a fire.(最古老的一幢房子在一场大火中被烧毁了)
7. ―Which / Who+动词+形/副,?,?or??‖句型中,如果有两个选项,形/副用比较级,如果有三个选项,形/副用最高级。如:Who has more books, Lin Tao or Han Mei?(林涛和韩梅谁的书最多,)/ Which is the heaviest, a pig, a horse or an elephant?(猪、马、象哪个最重,)
8. 上下文中含有both/either/neither/two/twins等表示两个事物的词时,用比较级,而且往往还要加the;含有all/none/no one/ every 等表示三个或三个以上事物时,用最高级。如: —Do you like the smaller one?—Neither.(小一点的那个你喜欢吗,一个都不喜欢)/ —Which do you like best? —All of them!(你最喜欢哪个,全部。)
23
额外补识:such和so搭配名词时的用法说明
such和so两个单词的中文意思相近，学生在使用时很容易混淆。其实，这两个单词的用法并不相同，首先要注意的是，两个单词的词性不同;such为形容词，意思是―这(那)样的;这(那)种;如此的‖，主要用来修饰名词;例如: No such thing has ever happened.
I have never seen such a beautiful place before.
而so是副词，意思为―这(那)么;这(那)样;如此地‖，主要用来修饰形容词、副词和分词。例如:
Last time I saw him he was so fat!
He was not so much angry as disappointed.
但是，such和so都可以用于名词词组。下文主要介绍一下它们在名词词组中的用法: 一、后接可数名词的单数形式
1、直接跟名词时，用such;例如:
However did you make such a mistake?
I have never heard of such a thing.
Why are you in such a hurry?
注意:当such前面有no时，必须省去不定冠词a(an)，因为no such本身已经包括了不定冠词，相当于not such a(an);例如:
I have no such book. (= I haven‘t such a book.)
、跟带有形容词的名词时，既可以用such，也可以用so，但应注意冠词位置的不同，2
例如:
I have never seen such a tall man.
I have never seen so tall a man.
He is not such a clever boy as his brother.
He is not so clever a boy as his brother.
二、后接可数名词的复数形式或集合名词，无论有无修饰语都用such，例如: Such things often happen in our daily life. Such people are dangerous.
Whales are such smart animals that they communicate with each other.
He made such stupid mistakes that the teacher tore up the whole paper.
三、后接不可数名词，无论有无修饰语都用such，例如:
Did you ever see such weather?
You can‘t drink such hot milk.
She made such rapid progress that she soon began to write articles in English.
四、当复数名词或集合名词之前有few，many;不可数名词之前有little，much修饰时，用so，例如:
24
so many people / so many students / so few days so much time / so much money / so little time等。
注意:上述词组中的so实际上修饰名词前的形容词。试比较下列两句:
?I have met many such people in my life.
?I didn‘t expect to meet so many people there.
上述两句中都有many，但却分别用了such和so，其位置不同，因此含义也不同。
在?中，many和such同时修饰后面的名词;而?句中的so修饰的则是many。
五、当many、much、little、few单独作为名词使用时，用so;例如:
There are so few that I can‘t give you one.
This is the girl I have told you so much about.
So much for today.
六、such可以和all、some、other、another、one、no、many、any、few、several等词同时修饰一个名词，但它的位置通常是放在这些词的后面，例如:
All such possibilities must be considered.
I need some such cards.
One such dictionary is enough for me.
We have had several such Chinese paintings already.
I hope never to meet with another such accident.
Close Contact with Examination:(试题直击)
1.There are many young trees on ______sides of the road.
A. every B. each C. both D. all
2. —It‘s so cold today.
— Yes, it‘s______ than it was yesterday.
A. more cold B. more colder C. much colder D. cold
3.Little Tom has______ friends, so he often plays alone.
A. more B. a little C. many D. few
4.She isn‘t so_______ at maths as you are.
A. well B. good C. better D. best
5.Peter writes _______of the three.
A. better B. best C. good D. well
6.He is ______enough to carry the heavy box.
A. stronger B. much stronger C. strong D. the strongest 7.I bought______ exercise-books with money.
A. a few; a few B. a few; a little C. a little; a few D. a little; a little
8.The box is ______heavy for the girl______ carry.
A. too; to B. to; too C. so; that D. no; to
9.The ice in the lake is about one meter______. It‘s strong enough to skate on.
25
A. long B. high C. thick D. wide
10.Wu Lin ran______ faster than the other boys in the sports meeting.
A. so B. much C. very D. too
11. Joan looks so _______ today because she has got an ―A‖ in her maths test.
A. happy B. happily C. angry D. angrily
12. The smile on my father‘s face showed that he was ______ with me.
A. sad B. pleased C. angry D. sorry
13. —Mum, could you buy me a dress like this?
—Certainly, we can buy ______ one than this, but ______ this.
A. a better; better than B. a worse; as good as
C. a cheaper; as good as D. a more important; good as 14. —This digital camera is really cheap!
—The ______ the better. I‘m short of money, you see.
A. cheap B. cheaper C. expensive D. more expensive 15. If you want to learn English well, you must use it as _______ as possible.
A. often B. long C. hard D. soon
16. Paul has ______ friends except me, and sometimes he feels lonely.
A. many B. some C. few D. more
17. English people _____ use Mr. Before a man‘s first name.
B. usually C. often D. sometimes A. never
18. —One more satellite was sent up into space in China in May.
—Right. The government spoke ______ that.
A. highly for B. high of C. well of D. highly of 19. —Remember this, children. ______ careful you are, ______ mistakes you will
make.
—We know, Miss Gao.
A. The more; the more B. The fewer; the more C. The more; the fewer D. The less; the less
20. I have ________ to do today.
A. anything important B. something important
C. important nothing D. important something
参考答案:
1.C 2.C 3.D 4.B 5.B 6.C 7.B 8.A 9.C 10.B 11.A 12.B 13.C 14.B 15.A 16.C 17.A 18.D 19.
C 20.B
26
Unit Three Articles冠词
Brief Introduction简介
1. 冠词分类及读法:
英语中冠词有不定冠词和定冠词两种,常放在名词的前面,用来限定名词的意义,起泛指或特指的作用。定冠词the读法:单独念时读[ð?:],在句子中常发[ð?]，元音之前常发【ði: 】或者[ð?](辅音之前);不定冠词a/an的读法:单独念时读 [ei ] / [ æn ];an在句子中常发[æn]或者[ ?n]。
2. 不定冠词a / an的用法:
不定冠词a / an用在单数名词的前面,a用在辅音开头的词前; an用在元音开头的词前。
不定冠词的基本用法:
1) 表示某一个人或东西,但不具体说明何人或何物。如:There is a dog lying on the
ground.(一
只狗躺在地上。)
2) 表示某类人或事物,以区别于其他种类。如:An elephant is much stronger than a
man.(大象比人强壮多了。)(不能译为:一头大象比一个人强壮。)
3) 表示某类人或事物中的任何一个。如:He is a teacher of English.(他是英语教师。)
a table and four chairs in that dining-room.(在那4) 表示―一‖这个数量。如:There is
个餐厅里有一张桌子和四把椅子。)
5) 几个用不定冠词的习语:a bit (一点), a little (一点), a few (几个), a lot (许多), a kind of (一种), a pair of (一副、一双), a number of (大量的), a piece of (一张、一片), half an hour (半小时), have a good time (玩得开心), have a cold (感冒), make a noise (发出嘈杂声), have/take a rest (休息)一会儿,等等。
3、定冠词the的用法:定冠词the用在可数名词的单数或复数或不可数的名词前面。 定冠词的基本用法:
1) 表示特指的人或事物。如:The man with a flower in his hand is Jack..(手上拿着
一朵花的男人是杰克)
2) 指谈话双方都熟悉的人或事物。如:Look at the blackboard, Lily.(莉莉,请看黑板。) 3) 复述前面提到过的人或事物。如:There is a man under the tree. The man is called
Robert.(树下有个人, 那个人叫 罗伯特。)
4) 表示世界上独一无二的事物。如:The earth turns around the sun.(地球绕太阳旋
转。)
5) 用在表示方位的名词前面。如:There will be strong wind to the south of the
Yangtze River.(长江以南地 区将会刮大风。)
6) 在序数词和形容词最高级的前面。如:Who is the first one to go?(谁第一个去,) /
Of all the stars, the sun is the nearest to the earth.(在所有的恒星之中太阳离地球
最近)
7) 常用在乐器名称的前面。如:He began to play the violin at the age of 5.(五岁时他
开始拉小提琴)
8) 用在江河、海洋、山脉等名称的前面。如:I have never been to the Himalaya
Mountains.(我从来没有去过喜马拉雅山)
27
9) 用在含有普通名词的专有名词的前面。如:He is from the United States of
America.(他来自美利坚合众国)
10) 用在姓氏之前表示一家人。如:The Greens are going to Mount Emei next
month.(下个月格林一家要去峨眉山)
11) same之前一般用the。如:Lucy and Lily look the same.(露西和莉莉看上去长得
一样)
12)几个用定冠词的习语:at the same time (与此同时), make the bed(铺床), in the end(最后), all the time(一直),by the way(顺便说一下),on the way(在路上)等等。
4. 一些不用冠词的情况:
1) 专有名词和(第一次使用)一些不可数名词时前面通常不用。如:
China is blessed with a rich ancient civilization.( 中国拥有丰富的古代文化。)
Man needs air and water.(人类需要空气和水。)
2) 名词前已有指示、物主或不定代词作定语时不用。如:
His plan is more practical than yours.(他的
计划
项目进度计划表范例计划下载计划下载计划下载课程教学计划下载
比你的更实际。)
3) 周名,月名或季节名前一般不用。如:He was born on Monday, February
18,1995.(他出生在1995年二月十八日,星期一) / They usually plant trees on the
hills in spring.(春天他们通常在山上植树)
4) (第一次使用)复数名词表示人或事物的类别时不用。如:
Humans are more complicated than animals.(人比动物复杂。)
5) 三餐饭前不用。如:We have breakfast at home and lunch at school.(我们在家吃早饭,在校吃午饭)
6) 节、假日前一般不用。如:
Children‘s Day the boys often get presents from their parents. On
(在儿童节,这些男孩经常得到父母的礼物)
7) 球类名词前不用。如:
The children play football on Saturday afternoons.(孩子们星期六下午踢足球) 8) 城市的重要/主要建筑物名称前不用。如:They are now at People‘s Cinema.(他们此刻在人民电影院)
9) 一些习惯用语中不用。
如:? at / to / from / out of / after / for school; ? in / to / for / after class; ?in / to / out of / into bed; ? after / at/ from / out of / to work; ? at / to sea; ? in / from / down / to town; ? at / from home; ? at / for / to breakfast/lunch/supper; ? at night/noon/midnight; ? on foot; ? go to school/bed; ? on top of; ? in front of; ? on show/display/duty/watch; ? in / out of hospital; ? at all; ? on/in time; ? at first/last/once; ? in Chinese/English,etc.; ? take care of
Right or Wrong(正误一观)
1.中文:她在弹钢琴。
(误)She was playing piano.
(正)She was playing the piano. (演奏乐器，如piano，violin，乐器前面要加定冠
词the。)
2.中文:孩子们每天早上去上学。
(误)The children go to the school every morning.
28
(正)The children go to school every morning. (go to school是习惯用语，不加the。) 3.中文:她有一头秀发。
(误)She has a beautiful hair.
(正)She has beautiful hair. (hair指头发的整体，是不可数名词，前面不加a。) 4.中文:她喜欢看电视。
(误)She likes to watch the TV.
(正)She likes to watch TV. (看电视，习惯上TV前不加the。)
5.中文:她在房间里听广播。
(误)She was listening to radio in the room.
(正)She was listening to the radio in the room. (听广播，习惯上radio前面加the。) 6.中文:尼罗河是埃及最长的河。
(误)Nile River is the longest river in Egypt.
(正)The Nile River is the longest river in Egypt. (在河流，山脉等名称前要用定冠
词。)
7.中文:天气不错。
(误)It's a nice weather.
(正)It is nice weather.(weather是不可数名词，前面不加a。)
8.中文:下星期再见。
(误)See you again the next week.
(正)See you again next week. (next week表示将来; the next week表示过去。) 9.中文:历史是很有趣的学科。
(误)The history is a very interesting subject.
(正)History is a very interesting subject. (学科前一般不加冠词。)
中文:他乘火车来这里。 10.
(误)He came here by a train.
(正)He came here by train. (by后接交通工具，中间不加冠词。)
11.中文:今晚你可以看到满月。
(误)You may see the full moon tonight.
(正)You may see a full moon tonight. (月亮，太阳等独一无二的物体，当有形容词
修饰时可加a。)
12.中文:她刚才去了保罗街。
(误)She went to the Paul Street just now.
(正)She went to Paul Street just now. (街道名称前一般不加the。)
13.中文:连孩子都会做它。
(误) Even child can do it.
(正) Even a child can do it. (不定冠词+单数名词表示某类人或物。)
Close Contact with Examination:(试题直击)
1. -What are you going to be when you grow up,
-I hope to be ________ artist when I grow up.
A. a B. an C. the D. / 2. -Are you ________ Chinese or American,
-Chinese. But I was brought up in New York.
A. an B. / C. the D. one
29
3. -How far is it from your school to ________ amusement park,
-It is ________ two-kilometer walk from here.
A. the;a B. / ;an C. the;an D. /;a
4. Antonia is ________ American girl. She studies in ________ university in
Changsha.
A. the;a B. a;a C. an;a D. an; an
5. -Have you got ________ E-mail address,
-Oh yes. Mine is hfc2008@sohu.com.
A. a B. an C. the D. / 6. -Have you seen ________ magazine, I left it here a moment ago. -Is it________ new English magazine, I saw it was taken away by Bruce.
A. a; a B. a;an C. a; the D. the; the
7. -How do you get home from ________, By bike,
-No， I walk. ________ isn't very far.
A. school;School B. the school;The school C. the school;School D. school;
The school
8. When he was________ small pupil， Bill Gates was always trying out new ideas.
A. a B. an C. the D. / 9. -Did you enjoy your stay in Guangzhou,
-Yes. We had ________ wonderful time in the White Clouds Hill.
A. a B. an C. the D. / 10. Jim is good at ________ piano. He does well in ________ football， too.
A. playing，playing B. playing，playing the C. playing the，to play D. playing
， playing the
11. There's ________apple tree in front of ________house.
A. an， / B. the， the C.an， the D. a， the
12. It takes us ________ hour or more to go to my hometown by ________ train.
A. an， a B. a， an C. an， / D. a， /
13. We can't see ________sun at ________ night.
A. a， / B. a， the C. the， / D. the， the
14. -Where is Tom, -He's having ________ rest over there.
A. a B. an C. the D. / 15. This is ________song I've told you about. Isn't it ________beautiful song,
A. the;the B. a; a C. the; a D. a; the
[答案与解析]
1. B. 这组对话的意思是:"你长大后打算干什么,""我长大后希望成为一名艺术家。
"该题测试冠词的用法，用焦点法。artist 是个读音以元音开头的名词，其前面要用
不定冠词an.
2. B. 这组对话的意思是:"你是中国人还是美国人,""中国人，不过，我在纽约长
大".该题测试冠词的用法，用直接法。Chinese， Japanese， American等作"某国
人"讲时，是专有名词，前面不用冠词。
3. A. 这组对话的意思是:"从我们学校到游乐园有多远,""步行要走两公里。"该题
测试冠词的用法。amusement park 是问话者特指的"那个游乐园"，因此，前面要加
30
定冠词。two-kilometer是个形容词性词组，作定语，修饰后面的 walk.这个词组以辅音音素开头，因此第二空要用不定冠词a.
4. C. 题干的意思是:安东尼娅是个美国女孩。她在长沙的一所大学学习。该题测试冠词的用法。American是个读音以元音开头的形容词，修饰后面的名词girl.故第一空填an.university尽管是元音字母开头，但读音不是以元音音素开头，类似的名词或词组有useful， one-eyed dog等。因此第二空要选a.
5. B. 这组对话的意思是:"你有电子信箱吗,""噢，有。我的电子信箱是hfc2008@sohu.com.该题测试冠词的用法。e-mail在这里是名词，其开头的读音是元音，所以，要选不定冠词an.
6. A. 这组对话的意思是:"你看见一本杂志了吗,我刚忘在这儿的。""是一本新的英语杂志吗,我看见布鲁斯拿去了。"该题测试冠词的用法。从这组对话的意思来看，问句和答语中的"杂志"都是泛指，因此要选不定冠词。magazine是个读音以辅音开头的名词，前面要用不定冠词a;new是个读音以辅音开头的形容词，作定语，前面也要用a.
7. D. 这组对话的意思是:"你从学校怎么回家,乘公共汽车吗,""不是乘公共汽车，而是步行回家，学校离我家不远。" 这是一道测试冠词与名词相结合的题。第一空所提到的名词，属于泛指，前面不加定冠词。在当代口语交际中，习惯上也不用冠词。这样就可排除B、C两个选项。根据"同一个名词，在一个句子或一段对话中，再次提到时，前面要加定冠词"这一语法规则，就可把A项排除掉。 8. A. 这句话的意思是:比尔。盖茨是个小孩时，总是探索新方法。该题测试冠词的用法，用语法分析法。small 是读音以辅音开头的形容词，位于名词前面作定语。所以其前要用不定冠词a.
9. A. 这组对话的意思是:"你们在广州玩得开心吗,""是的。在白云山我们玩得很开心。"该题测试冠词的用法，用固定结构判断法。have a wonderful time和have a good time一样，属固定结构。
10. D. 此题易误选为A或B或C.选A或B的考生只注意到介词后面接动词时要用其ing形式;选C的考生考虑到了冠词的正确运用的问题，却没有注意到第2空也是在介词后面。这样的错误都是由草率做题造成的。正确答案为D. 11. C. 此题易误选为A.这是由于受到汉语思维的影响引起的，因为这句话的意思为"房子前面有一棵苹果树"，这里的房子是特指的，而不是泛指的，故正确答案为C. 12. C. 此题易误选为B或D.错误的原因是把hour当作以辅音音素开头的单词。此题考查冠词的用法，英语中对冠词的考查不外乎考冠词的泛指、特指或者固定搭配。这里hour是以元音音素开头的单词，前面要用不定冠词an，而不用a;后面by train是固定搭配。
13. C. 此题易误选为A或B.这是由于受到汉语思维的影响引起的。其实，特指世界上独一无二的名词前面一般要用定冠词the修饰，如:the earth， the moon， the sun. 14.A. 考查短语中的冠词。have a rest休息。
15. C. 考查冠词。第一空是特指，用定冠词the;第二空是表示类别，用a.句意是:这就是我跟你谈起过的那首歌;这难道不是一首美妙的歌曲吗,
31
Unit Four Prepositions介词
Brief Introduction简述
介词是一种虚词,不能独立使用。介词之后一般有名词或代词(宾格)或相当于名((
词的其他词类、短语或从句作它的宾语,即构成介词短语。有些介词是由两个以上的词构成的短语介词,如:out of(从…中出来), because of(因为), away from(距离…), on top of(在…顶上), ever since(自从…), next to(在…隔壁), according to(根据…), in front of(在…前方)等。
Types of Preposition介词种类
地点(位置、范围)介词:above在…前, about在…附近, across在…对面, after在…后
面, against倚着..., along在…近旁, among在…中间, around在…周围, round
在….周围, at在…处, before在...前, behind在...后, below低于..., beside在...旁
边, between在...之间, by在...旁, down在...下面, from来自..., in在...里面, inside
在...里面, near靠近..., of在...之中, on在...上面, out of在...之外, outside在....外面,
over在....上方, under在...下方, up在...上面, on top of在...顶部, in front of
在...前, close to靠近..., in the middle of在...的中间, at the end of在...的末端,等
等。
方向(目标趋向)介词:across横越..., against对抗..., along沿着..., around绕着...,
round环绕..., at朝着..., behind向…后面, between…and…从…到...,by路过/通
过..., down向…下, for向..., from从/离..., in进入..., into进入..., inside到...里面,
near接近..., off脱离/除..., on向...上, out of向...外, outside向....外, over跨过...,
past经过/超过..., through穿过..., to向/朝..., towards朝着..., on to到...上面, onto
到...上面, up向...上, away from远离...
时间介词:about大约..., after在…以后, at在… (时刻), before在…以前, by到…为
止, during在…期间, for有…(之久), from从…(时)起, in在(上/下午);在(多久)以
后, on在(某日), past过了…(时), since自从…(至今), through 贯穿…(期间), till
直到…时, until直到…时, to到(下一时刻), ever since从那时起至今,at the
beginning of在...开始时 ,at the end of在...末 , in the middle of在...当中 ,at the
time of在...时
方式介词:as作为/当作..., by用/由/乘坐/被..., in用…(语言), like与…一样, on骑
(车)/徒(步),通过(收音机/电视机), over通过(收音机), through通过..., with用(材
料),用(手/脚/耳/眼), without没有…
涉及介词: about关于..., except除了…, besides除了…还... for对于/就…而言, in
在…(方面), of…的,有关..., on关于/有关..., to对…而言, towards针对..., with
就…而言
它类介词:
【目的介词】 for为了..., from防止…, to为了…
【原因介词】 for因为..., with由于…, because of因为...
32
【比较介词】 as与…一样,like象…一样,than比...,to与…相比, unlike与…不同
【伴随/状态介词】 against和…一起(比赛), at在(上班/休息/上学/家,etc.), in穿着…(衣服/颜色), into变成...,on在 (值日), with与…一起,有/带着/长着..., without没有/无/不与…一起
Preposition and Its Particular Usages:
介词短语相当于一个形容词或副词,可用作状语、定语和表语,例如:
The man came(down the stairs). (状)(那个人走下楼来)
The woman(with a flower on her head)is from the countryside.(定)(头上戴花的妇女来自乡下)
The teacher is now with the pupils.(表)(老师现在和学生在一起)
Position of Preposition
介词短语做状语时, 如果表示时间/地点,可以放在句首或句尾, 如果表示方向/方
式/伴随/
涉及/原因/目的/比较,一般放在句尾; 介词短语作表语时放在连系动词之后;介词短语作定语时,只能放在被修饰的名词之后。如:He wanted to find a good job in
Shanghai the next year.(状语)(他想来年在上海找份好工作)/ They searched the room
for the thief.(他们在房间里搜寻小偷) / The letters are for you.(表语)(信是给你的)/ Have you seen a cat with a black head and four white legs?(定语)(你看见一只黑头白腿的猫了吗,)
Analyzing and Distinguishing
某些介词的用法辨析:
? 时间或地点介词in、on、at的用法区别:表示时间时, in表示在一段时间里(在
将来时句子中则表示在一段时间之后), on表示在具体的某一天或者某天的上
下午等, at表示在某个时刻或者瞬间; 表示地点时, in表示在某个范围之内,
on表示在某个平面上或与一个面相接触,at则表示在某个具体的场所或地点。
如:He was born on the morning of May 10th.(他出生于五月十日的早晨)/ I
usually get up at 7:00 in the morning.(我通常在早上的七点钟起床) / His
glasses are right on his nose.(他的眼镜就架在他的鼻子上)/ He is at the cinema
at the moment.(此刻他正在电影院)
? after与in表示时间的用法区别:―after+(具体时刻/从句)‖表示―在…时刻之后‖
常用于一般时态;―in+(一段时间)‖表示―在(多久)之后‖,常用于将来时态。如:
He said that he would be here after 6:00.(他说他六点钟之后会来这儿)/ My
father is coming back from England in about a month.(我父亲大约一个月以后
从英国回来)
? since与for表示时间的用法区别:―since+(具体时刻/that-从句)‖表示―自从…起
一直到现在‖,―for +(一段斶间)‖表示―总共有…之久‖,都常用于完成时态;如:
He' s thinned down a lot since he went on a diet. (他自从节制饮食以来已经瘦
了不少.)/ That idea has been dead for years. (这种观点已经有些年听不见了。) ? by、in与with表示方式的用法区别:都可以表示―工具、手段‖,但是by主要表
示―乘坐‖某个交通工具或―以……方式‖,在被动句中可以表示动作的执行者;
in表示―使用‖某种语言/文字,with表示―使用‖某个具体的工具、手段。如:
We see with our eyes and walk with our feet.(我们用眼睛视物,用双脚走路)/
33
Please write that article(文章) in English.(请你用英语写那篇文章)/ Let‘s go to
the zoo by taxi.(我们打车去动物园吧。)/ It was designed by NASA and will be
used to carry out surveillance. (这架飞机是由美国太空总署所设计，以后将会
被用来执行监视的工作。)
? about与on的用法区别:都可以表示―有关…‖,但是about的意义比较广,而on
主要表示―有关…(专题/课程)‖。如:Tom is going to give a talk on the history of
America.(汤姆要作一个美国历史的
报告
软件系统测试报告下载sgs报告如何下载关于路面塌陷情况报告535n,sgs报告怎么下载竣工报告下载
)/ They are very excited talking about
the coming field trip.(他们兴致勃勃地谈论着即将来到的野外旅游)
? through与across、over的用法区别: through指―穿过…(门洞/人群/树林)‖;
across和over可以指―跨越…(街道/河流)‖,可互换,但是表示―翻过…‖时只能用
over. 如:Just then a rat (鼠)ran across the road.(就在那时一只老鼠跑过路面)/
There is a bridge across/over the river.(河上有座桥)/ They climbed over the
mountain and arrived there ahead of time.(他们翻过大山提前到达了那里)/
The visitors went through a big gate into another park.(参观者们穿过一个大
门来到另一个公园)
(7)as与like的区别:两个词都表示―像……‖,但是as译为―作为……‖,表示的是职
业、职务、作用等事实,而like译为―像……一样‖,表示外表,不是事实。如:Let
me speak to you as a father.(我以父亲的身份和你讲话。)(说话者是听者的父亲)
/ Let me speak to you like a father.(让我像一位父亲一样和你讲话)(说话者不
是听者的父亲)
(8)at the end of、by the end of、to the end、in the end的用法区别:at the end of…
既可以表示时间也可以表示地点,译为―在…末;在…尽头‖,常与过去时连用;
by the end of…只能表示时间,译为―在…前;到…为止‖,常用于过去完成时; in
the end与at last基本等义,表示―终于、最后‖,通常用于过去时;to the end译
By the end of 为―到…的终点为止‖,前面往往有表示运动或连续性的动词。如:
last term we had learned 16 units of Book III.(到上学期期末我们已经学习了
第三册16个单元)/ At the end of the road you can find a big white house with
brown windows.(在路的尽头你能找到一幢有棕色窗户的白房子)/ They left for
Beijing at the end of last week.(上周末他们动身去了北京)/ In the end he
succeeded in the final exams.(他最终在期末考试中考及格了)/ We should go on
with the work to the end.(我们应该把工作干到底)/ Follow this road to the end
and you will see a post office.(沿这条路走到底就能看见一家邮电局)
(9)for a moment、for the moment、in a moment、at the moment的区别:for a
moment―一会儿、片刻‖(=for a while),常与持续性动词连用;for the moment―暂
时、目前‖,常用于现在时;in a moment―一会儿、立即、马上‖(=soon; in a few
minutes),一般用于将来时;at the moment―此刻,眼下‖(=now),用于现在进行
时。如:Please wait for a moment.(请稍等)/ Let‘s leave things as they are for the
moment.(暂时就维持现状吧～) / I‘ll come back in a moment.(我过会儿回来)/ I
am very busy at the moment.(眼下我很忙)
(10)but的问题:用介词but引出另一个动词时,要注意:如果前面有do,后面就用
原形动词,前面没有do时,后面的动词要加to。如:I could do nothing but
wait.(我什么也做不了只能等) / They had no choice(选择) but to fight.(他们没
有选择只有战斗)
(11)in front of 与in the front of: in front of―在…的前面‖, 与in the front of―在…
34
的前部‖。如:A car was parking in front of the hall.(大厅跟前停着一辆汽车)/
In the front of the hall stood a big desk.(大厅前部立着一个大讲台)
(12)except与besides的区别:except―除了‖,表示排除掉某人物,即不包含;而
besides―除了‖则表示包含,即―不仅……又……‖。如:Everyone went to the
Palace Museum except Tom.(除了Tom,大家都去了故宫博物院)(Tom没有去故
宫)/ Besides Chinese he also studied many other subjects.(除了汉语之外,他还
学其他许多功课)(―汉语‖也是他学的功课之一)
Close Contact with Examination:(试题直击)
1. Japan is ______ the east of China.
A. in B. to C. on D. at
答案:B.(in表示在范围里的，on表示紧挨着的;to表示在范围以外的。)
2. The postman shouted，" Mr. Green, here is a letter ______ you."
A. to B. from C. for D. of
答案:C.(选择A的同学要注意to 表示动作的方向，for表示有从属关系或者利益
关系。)
3. We can't do it ______ your help.
A. with B. of C. under D. without 答案:D.(选择C的同学要排除中文的干扰， 借助某人的帮助要用with，反之用
without。
4. He hasn't heard from his friend ______ last month.
A. since B. by the end of C. for D. until 答案:A.(选择B的同学要注意B选项为过去完成时的时间;选择C的同学要注意，
for+时间段;选择D的同学要注意不是not...until句型, until +句子。)
5. I didn't buy the dictionary yesterday _____ my aunt would give me one.
A. until B. because C. if D. before 答案:B.(选择A的同学要注意语境。)
6. I'm going to look for another job ______ the company offers me more money.
A. after B. Unless C. When D. for 答案:B.(选择其他3项的同学要注意语境， 这里是指:除非公司给我更多工资，
否则我就要找其他工作。)
7. Don't hurry. The bus won't start ______ everybody gets on.
A. since B. as C. until D. when 答案:C.(选择D的同学要注意前面是否定。)
8. Please show me ______ to send an e-mail， John. It's the first time for me to do it.
A. how B. what C. when D. where 答案:A.(选择C的同学要注意认真看题，这里的time不是时间，而是指第一次。)
9. You've passed the exam. I'm happy _____ you.
A. on B. at C. in D. for
答案:D. (选择A的同学要注意记忆词组的准确性。)
10. I wonder ______ they finished so many different jobs in such a short time.
A. why B. how C. when D. where
答案:B.(选择A的同学要注意语境，这里指他们怎么能在如此短的时间里完成这
么多困难的工作。)
35
11.- Do you speak English, - Yes，I speak _________ a little English _______
some French.
A. neither, not B. both, or C. either, or D. not only, but also 答案:D.(选择C的同学要注意语境。)
12. ______ the maths problem is difficult， I'll try very hard to work it out.
A. Though B. When C. Before D. After
答案:A.(选择B的同学要注意语境。不能说当题目难的时候，我将努力。而是说尽管题目难，但我将努力解决。)
13. The accident took place ________ a cold February evening.
A. on B. in C. at D. for
答案:A.(选择B的同学要注意，在特指的早上、下午、晚上，不用in要用on。) 14. He turned ________ the radio because his father was asleep.
A. on B. down C. up D. over
答案:B.(根据语境:他爸爸睡着了，因此不能用A打开，也不能用C调大，D表示反过来。)
15. I don't know the homework _______ today.
A. on B. in C. of D. for
答案:D.(选择C的同学要注意of表示从属关系，要排除中文的干扰。) 16. -Oh, it's raining heavily. -Please don't leave ________ it stops.
A. when B. after C. since D. until
答案:D.(选择其他选项的同学要注意读懂句子， 只有把语境搞清楚才能答对问题。) 17.Jane said she would come here ________ 9:00 and 9:30 tomorrow morning.
A. from B. at C. between D. around
答案:C.(选择B的同学没有把题看完整;选择A的同学没有注意到from...to...的搭配。)
Unit Five Numerals数词
数词有基数词(cardinal number)和序数词(ordinal number)两种。英语的数词可以作句子的主语、宾语、表语和定语。
Cardinal Numbers
基数词在句中可用作下列句子成分:
1. 主语
Two plus nine is eleven.(二加九等于十一。)
Four times six is twenty-four.(四乘六得二十四。)
Three of them went to college last year.(他们当中去年有三人上大学了。) 注意:如说the three of them，意思则是"他们三个人"。
2. 宾语
Give me two.(给我两个。)
3. 定语
There are nineteen students in our class.(我们班有十九个同学。)
36
At some time more than five billion years ago the universe started.(在50亿年前的某个时候，宇宙开始形成。)
注:hundred(百)，thousand(千)和million(百万)作定语用时一律不用复数;作名词用(后面多跟of短语)时则用复数。如:
China has a population of more than 1.3 billion, and its land natural resources per
capita are far lower than the world's average.(中国有13亿多人口，陆地自然资源人均占有量远低于世界平均水平。)
There are three thousand students in the university.(这所大学有三千学生。) Rice has been cultivated in the East for thousands of years.(水稻在东方已经种植了几千年。)
Maize is the most important food crop for millions of people in the world.(玉米是全世界千百万人最主要的粮食。)
4. 表语
She is just fourteen.(她刚十四岁。)
He was already forty when he began to learn English.(他开始学英语时已经四十岁了。)
Ordinal Numbers
1. 序数词的构成及其说明
1) 序数词第一、第二和第三为first, second和third,其他序数词的构成是在基数词后加―th‖。例如:
six?sixth seven?seventh，ten?tenth four?fourth 2) fifth(第五)、 eighth (第八)、 ninth (第九)和twelfth (第十二)在拼法上有变化。 3) 二十、三十等基数词变为序数词时,要把y变成ie再加-th。例如:
twenty?twentieth，forty?fortieth
4) 基数词几十几变成序数词时,表示几十的数词不变,只把表示几的基数词变成序数词。例如:
twenty-one?twenty-first forty-five?forty-fifth
5) 第一百、第一千、第一百万、第十亿都是在基数词后直接加 -th构成。例如:
第一百?hundredth 第一千?thousandth第一百万?millionth 第十亿?billionth 6) 序数词的缩略形式是由阿拉伯数字加序数词的最后两个字母构成。例如:
1st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th, 21st, 32nd, 40th
2. 序数词在句子中的应用
序数词在句中主要是充当定语，也可以作主语、表语、宾语，前面要加定冠词the。例如:
The first time I saw a seal was in an aquarium. (我第一次看见海豹是在水族馆里。)
What day is the tenth ? (十号星期几?)
Number of Other Sorts
1.分数
37
分数由基数词和序数词合成。分子用基数词，分母用序数词。分子是1.时，分母(序数词)用单数形式;分子大于1时，分母用复数形式，序数词加-s。读带分数时，先读整数部分，再读分数部分。例如:
1/2?one half 或 a half 1/4?one fourth 或 one (a) quarter
3/4?three quarters或 three fourths 4/5?four fifths
2-1/3?two and a (one)third 3-5/6?three and five sixths
32-3/4?thirty-two and three quarters(three fourths)
2.小数
整数与小数之间用小数点隔开。读小数时,每位数字(特别是小数点后面的)要单独读出。小数点读作point(点)，零读作zero(或naught)。如果整数是零,往往不读出。例如:
0.1?zero(naught)point one,或point one
0.03?zero(naught)point naught three或zero point zero three 2.25?two point two five
14.163?fourteen point one six three
205.37?two hundred and five point three seven
注意:
1) 和带分数连用的名词, 用复数。 例如:
-1/2.hours读作:three and a half hours或three hours and a half 3
2) 如果带分数的整数部分是1,名词读在带分数之后时,名词要用复数;而名词读在1与分数之间时,名词则用单数。 例如:
1-1/2.tons读作:one and a half tons或one (a)ton and a half
1-1/3.miles读作:one and a third miles或one (a)mile and a third 3) 与小数连用的名词的数:整数是零时,名词用单数形式,其他情况名词用复数形式。 例如:
0.27.meter?zero point two seven of a metre
1.26.meters?one point two six meters
3.百分数
注意下面形式:
5%?5.per cent(缩写:5.PC) 读作:five percent 23%?23.per cent(缩写:23.PC) 读作:twenty-three percent
4.常见的数字符号和等式的读法
=(等于号)读作 equals +(加号)读作 plus或and例如:
3+2=5.Three plus two equals(或is) five.或Three and two is (或are) five.或Three and two make five.
,(减号)读作minus例如:5,3=2. Five minus three equals(或is) two. ×(乘号)读作times 或multiplied by例如:
8×7=56. Eight times seven equals (或is)fifty-six.或Eight multiplied by seven is
fifty-six.或Eight sevens are fifty-six.
?(除号)读作divided by例如:
10?5=2Ten divided by five equals(或is)two.
38
Various Expressions of Time:
5. 表示时刻有两种说法:
1)先说分钟,后说钟点。几点过几分，分钟不超过三十分钟时用past。例如:It‘s five past seven now. 现在是七点(过)五分。
注:几点差几分或差几分几点，差的分钟数不超过二十九分钟时,用to。例如: It‘s twenty-nine to five. 五点差二十九分。
It‘s a quarter to six. 差一刻六点。
2)先说钟点,后说分钟。在日常生活中,为了简便,常用这种说法。例如:It‘s six thirty.六点三十分。
6.年月日表达(Date, Month and Year)
1)年份用基数词,日期用序数词。例如:
1988年5月1日可以写作 May 1(st), 1988，读作May the first,nineteen eighty-eight;也可以写作 1(st)May, 1988, 读作the first of May, nineteen eighty-eight
2)英语年份的读法:一般先读前两位数,再读后两位数。例如:
1983?nineteen eighty-three 1700?seventeen hundred
1870?eighteen seventy 1601?sixteen a one或sixteen hundred and one
965?nine sixty-five 或nine six five
注意:
?日期可全用阿拉伯数字,但是英国人和美国人的写法不同。英国人先写日子,美国人则先写月份。 例如:
06-08-1988=1988年8月6日(英国) =1988年6月8日(美国)
?年份的后面不用year(年),但有时前面有用year的, 如in the year 1949(读作in the year nineteen forty-nine)。
?公元前的年份后面加 B.C.(采用before Christ的第一个字母,意思是公元前)。 如221 B.C. 可读作two twenty-one B.C. (公元前221年)。公元后的年份一般在后面加A. D.(拉丁语Anno Domini的第一个字母,in the year of the Lord,意思是公元)。有时也有把A.D.加在前面的,如A.D. 2011(=2011 A.D.)。
3)年代用年份的阿拉伯数字加-‘s 或-s表示。例如:
十八世纪三十年代?1730‘s/1730s the seventeen thirties
二十世纪六十年代?1960‘s/1960s the nineteen sixties
八十年代初期?the early eighties九十年代末期?the late nineties
二十世纪六十年代中期?the mid 1960‘s (1960s)/the mid nineteen sixties
4)月份。一年12个月的英语写法如下。
一月?January 二月?February三月?March 四月?April 五月?May六月?June七月?July 八月?August
九月?September十月?October十一月?November十二月?December 7.Half的用法 (Half and Its Hows)
1)―half a(an)+名词‖或―a half+名词‖表示―一半……‖。例如:
half a kilo 半公斤 half an hour 半小时
a half day 半天 a half building 半座楼
2) ―一个半‖的表示法
表示―一个半‖有两种表示法。例如:
39
一个半小时 one hour and a half， one and a half hours
四个半橘子 four oranges and a half， four and a half oranges
8.大约数表达法
表示―大约……‖可以用about(or so), almost(nearly), less than(under少于), more than(over多于)等表示。例如:
Three or four hours later,he will leave China for Japan by plane.
(三四个小时后，他将乘飞机离开中国去日本。)
They stayed in China nearly one month last year.(去年他们在中国呆了将近一个月。)
My home is less than ten kilometers away from our school.(我家离学校不到十公里远。)
9. 电话号码及编号
编号既可以用序数词,也可用基数词。例如:
the tenth lesson Lesson Ten 第十课
the fiftieth page page 50第五十页
有的编号习惯上常用基数词。例如:
Room 321(读作three two one) 321号房间
Tel.No.4013586(读作Telephone number four 0 one three five eight six) 电话号码
4013586
这和汉语中有时不用第几而用基数词表示序数的用法相同。
如:三楼、一百二十二号等。
Combined with Others(与其他词连用)
1. a second time, a third one表示―又一‖、 ―再一‖ ，例如: Would you like to come to Beijing a second time? 你还愿意再次来北京吗, After eating two cakes, he ate a third one. 吃了两块蛋糕后，他又吃了一块。
思考对比:He has been in Japan for the first time. 他第一次来日本。 2. ―数词+名词(单数)‖用作定语
Sometimes his six-year-old son's saying is quaint.(有时，他六岁的儿子说的话很有趣。)
We‘ll have a two-month holiday.(我们将拥有一个两个月的假期。)This is a ten-metre-tall tree.(这是一棵十米高的树。)
Close Contact with Examination:(考点聚焦)
考点一:基数词的记忆的考查
1.There are _______ days in a week.
A. the seven B. seventh C. the seventh D. seven (2002北京海淀区) 2.—Can you write the number eighty-five thousand，six hundred and twenty-six, —Yes，it is. ________.
A. 85662 B. 85626 C. 58662 D. 58626 (2001江西)
[分析]基数词的写法须熟记:1至12逐个记忆，13至19均以-teen结尾;20至90十位数整数皆以后缀-ty结尾;21至99(整十除外)，在十位数与个位数之间加连字符号;
40
101至999，在百位与十位之间加 and;一千以上的基数词，从后面向前数，阿拉伯数字每三位为一段，用逗号分开，所用的数字名称依次为thousand，million，billion，需要注意的是，在这里它们的后面不能加-s。
考点二、序数词构成和用法的考查
3. I think ______ lesson is the most difficult in this book.
A. five B. fifth C. the fifth D. fifteen (2002大连)
4. December is the ______ month in a year.
A. twenty B. twelve C. twentieth D. twelfth (2002吉林)
[分析] 序数词的构成一般是在基数词后加-th，但也有几个例外。请记住这个顺口溜:―一、二、三特殊记;词尾字母是t，d，d;八减t;九去e;f替ve;逢上y字换ie;词尾普加th。‖另外，序数词前一般要用定冠词the。
考点三、分数词构成、用法的考查
5. About ______ of the workers in the clothes factory are women.
A. third fifths B. third fifth C. three fifths D. three fifth (2002甘肃) ,分析,分数词的写法一般是:分子用基数词表示，分母用序数词表示:分子为―1‖，分母用序数词的单数形式;分子大于―1‖，分母用序数词的复数形式。另外，分数主语的数取决于of后面的名词的数。
考点四、数词与名词表编号的考查
6. The new student is in _______.
A. Class 2 B. Class Second C. 2 Class (2002武汉)
,分析,在通常情况下，表示年级、班、行、课等的编号时用基数词。其习惯表达为年级、班、行、课等的词在前，基数词在后，且词首的字母要大写。即―名词，基数词‖也可用―the，序数词，名词‖表示。
考点五、hundred，thousand，million等词复数形式的考查
7. ______ travelers come to visit our city every year.
A. Hundred of B. Hundreds of C. Five hundreds D. Hundred (2002哈尔滨) ,分析,一般地，基数词 hundred，thousand，million，billion等前有具体数字时，它们后面不能加-s，也不带of。它们的复数形式后面常需跟of...短语，表示约数。如:hundreds of数百，thousands of成千上万，millions of数百万。
8. Our first class begins at a quarter to eight.
A. 8:15 B. 7:15 C. 8:45 D. 7:45 (2002厦门)
,分析,钟点的表达形式一般有两种:即顺读法:先说―点钟‖，再说―分钟‖;逆读法:30分钟以内用―分钟数，past，钟点数‖，注意:半小时要用half，15分钟用a quarter。30分钟以外要用―分钟数，to，下一个钟点‖。
答案: 1—5 DBCDC 6—8 ABD
中考精确制导
1(September is the _____ month of the year.
A. ninths B. ninth C. tenth D. eleventh 2(He wrote a _______ letter.
41
A. five-hundreds-words B. five-hundreds-word C. five-hundred-word D. five-hundred-words
3(We can see _______ stars at night if it doesn\'t rain.
A. thousand of B. thousands C. thousands of D. thousand 4(The computer of this kind can work ______ than the one of that kind.
A. hundred of times faster B. a hundred time faster
C. hundred times faster D. hundreds of times faster
5. About ______ of the workers in that factory are young people.
A. third fifths B. three fifths C. three fives D. three fifth 6. ________ of the population here are peasants.
A. 20 percents B. 20 percent C. The 20 percent D. The 20 percents 【解析】
1. 从考题所提供的答案可知应选择序数词，序数词用来表示数目的顺序，September
表示9月份，即一年中第九个月，第九应该是ninth，不是ninths。答案为B。
2. 数字用连字符\"-\"连接作复合定语修饰名词时，连字符连接的名词和数词都必须
用单数。故答案为C。
3. 当thousand修饰名词时，其前没有数词或a时，则要在thousand之后加s和of
连用，表示\"成千上万的\"。故答案为C。
4. 表示\"数百\"、\"数千\"、\"数百万\"等不确切数目时，要用hundreds / thousands
。 / millions of结构表示。D中hundreds of times意思是\"数百倍\"。答案为D
5. 表示分数时，分子用基数词，分母用序数词。分子大于1时，分母要用复数形式。
答案为B。
6.数词 + percent(百分比)，前面不加冠词，且percent后不加s。答案为B。
42
Unit Six Verbs动词
动词概说
1. 动词(verb)是表示动作或状态的词。
a)表示动作:swim游泳push推
b)表示状态:have有be是
2. 英语动词有时态、语态、语气等形式上的变化。
限定动词和非限定动词
从是否被主语所限定来分，动词有限定动词(finite verb)和非限定动词(non-finite verb)
两大类。
1. 限定动词 限定动词用作句子的谓语动词，并被主语所限定，有人称和数的变化。
如:
He is booming as a teacher. (作为一位教师他正日趋成功。)
Facts are more eloquent than words.事实胜于雄辩。
We have friends all over the world.我们的朋友遍天下。
An apple falls by the force of gravitation.地心吸力使苹果落地。 2. 非限定动词(又称作非谓语动词): 非限定动词有动词不定式、动名词和分词三种，在句子里都不能单独作谓语动词，故不被主语所限定，没有人称和数的变化。如:
am very pleased to make your acquaintance . 认识您我很高兴。(动词不定式) I
Smoking is harmful to the health.吸烟对身体有害。(动名词)
Dusk saw the little boy wandering alone in the street. 黄昏时发现这个小孩在街上独自徘徊。(现在分词)
Spoken words are often more powerful than writing.语言往往比文字更有力。(过去分词)
实义动词、连系动词、情态动词和助动词
从其含义来分，动词有实义动词(notional verb)，连系动词(1ink verb)，情态动词(modal verb)和助动词(auxiliary verb)四类。
1. 实义动词 实义动词有完全的词义，并能独立作谓语动词。如:
The sun shone brightly this morning.今天早晨阳光灿烂。
He likes to go for a long walk on Sundays.他喜欢星期日出去作长距离散步。
We have a big TV set in the club.我们俱乐部有台大电视机。
2. 连系动词 连系动词在句中作谓语动词，后面跟表语。英语连系动词有be(是)，seem(似乎)，look(看来)，keep(保持)，become(变成)，get(变得)，grow(变得)，feel(感到)，turn(变得，变成)，appear(显得)，remain(仍旧是)等。如:
It is never too late to mend.改过不嫌晚。
It was a close game.那场球赛比分很接近。
The children in this nursery look very healthy.这个托儿所的孩子看起来都非常健康。
Keep quiet，please!请安静!，
The tape recorder seems all right.这台录音机好像没有毛病。
Later he became a doctor.他后来成为一名医生。
The problem remained unsolved until last year.问题直到去年才解决。
43
[注意]下面句子中的come和go也是连系动词。如:
The old man's dream has come true.这位老人的梦想实现了。
Something has gone wrong with the truck.卡车出毛病了。
[注意]有些连系动词如seem, appear等后面常跟to be。如:
The new text seems to be easy，but actually it is rather difficult.这篇新课文好像很容易，其实相当难。
She appears to be the girl's sister.她似乎是那女孩的姐姐。
3. 情态动词 情态动词有can (能)，may (可以，也许)，must(必须)等及其过去式could，might等，表示能力、义务、必要、猜测等说话人的语气或情态。情态动词只能和主要动词一起构成谓语动词。
注: 关于情态动词详见第十一章。
4. 助动词 助动词有shall，will，have，be，should，would， do等。它们只能和主要动词一起构成各种时态、语态、语气等动词形式，以及否定和疑问等结构中的谓语动词。
及物动词和不及物动词
从是否需要宾语来分，实义动词又有及物动词和不及物动词两类。 1. 及物动词 后面必须跟宾语意义才完整的实义动词，叫做及物动词(transitive verb)。如:
I believe that the committee will consider our suggestion.我相信委员会将会考虑我们的建议。
"How long can I keep the book ?"Harry asked.哈里问:"这本书我可以借多久?"
Dr. Bethune set us a good example. 白求恩大夫给我们树立了好榜样。
Crude oil contains many useful substances.原油含有许多有用的物质。 2. 不及物动词 本身意义完整后面不须跟宾语的实义动词，叫做不及物动词(intransitive verb)。如:
Birds fly.鸟会飞。
It happened in June 1932.这件事发生于一九三;年六月。
My watch stopped.我的表停了。
She spoke at the meeting yesterday evening. 她在昨天晚上的会上发了言。 3. 兼作及物动词和不及物动词 英语里有不少实义动词可以兼作及物动词和不及物动词。这样的动词又有两种不同的情况:
a)兼作及物动词和不及物动词时，意义不变。试比较:
Shall I begin at once?我可以立刻开始吗?(begin作不及物动词)
She began working as a librarian after she left school.她毕业后当图书馆管理员。(began作及物动词)
When did they leave Chicago?他们是什么时候离开芝加哥的?(leave 作及物动词)
They left last week. 他们是上周离开的。(left 作不及物动词) b)兼作及物动词和不及物动词时，有时意义不尽相同。如:
Wash your hands before meals.饭前要洗手。
Does this cloth wash well? 这布经得起洗吗?
4. 与汉语的比较 有时英语动词的及物和不及物的用法，与汉语的用法不一样，请注意下列两种情况:
44
?有的动词在英语里只能用作不及物动词，而汉语则可用作及物动词，如arrive到达，agree同意，1isten听。英语里这些动词后面常接介词。如:
We arrived at the railway station at noon. 我们于中午到达火车站。(at不能省去) 比较:We reached the railway station at noon.
Everybody listened to the lecture with great interest. 每个人都很有兴趣地听讲课。(to不可省去) 比较:We all heard the lecture.
Do they agree to the plan?他们同意这个计划吗?(to不可省去)
?有的动词在英语里能用作及物动词，而在汉语里则不能用作及物动词，如serve为…服务。
Our children are taught to serve the people wholeheartedly.
我们的儿童被教以全心全意为人民服务。
短语动词
动词常和某些其他词类用在一起，构成固定词组，形成所谓短语动词(phrasal verb)。和动词一样，短语动词也可分为及物和不及物两种。短语动词可以作为一个整体看待，同一般动词一样使用。
1. 动词 + 介词 这类短语动词用作及物动词，后面须跟宾语。如:
The small boy insisted on going with his parents.那男孩坚持要跟父母一起去。
Do you often listen to broadcasts in English? 你常听英语广播吗?
Look at the children. Aren't they lovely?看着这些孩子们。他们多么可爱呀!
We stand for self-reliance.我们是主张自力更生的。
这一类的短语动词还有很多，如depend on (upon)(依靠)，wait on (服侍)，look for (寻找)，deal with(对待)，look after(照料)，wait for(等待)等。
2. 动词+副词 这类短语动词有的用作及物动词，有的用作不及物动词。如:
I always get up as soon as the bell rings. 我总是一打铃就起床。(不及物)
Look out，there's a car coming! 当心，来汽车了!(不及物)
Have you handed in your exercises already? 你已经交练习了吗?(及物)
Please don't forget to put on your coat;it's cold outside.请不要忘记穿外衣，外面很冷。(及物)
这一类的短语动词还有很多，及物如 put out (扑灭)， eat up (吃光)，put down(放下);不及物如set off (出发)，come up(走近)，go on(继续)。
[注一] "动词+副词"这类短语动词和上面第一类"动词 + 介词"的不同之处在于:"动词+ 介词"用作及物动词，后面须跟宾语。"动词 + 副词"则有的及物，有的不及物;用作及物动词而宾语为人称代词或自身代词时，副词往往放在宾语之后。如:
Please wake me up at five tomorrow.请在明天早上五点唤醒我。
If you have done your exercises，please hand them in.如果你们练习做完了请交来。
She doesn't normally behave like that;she's putting it on.她通常并不如此表现，她是装出来的。
[注二] 这类短语动词有不少可兼作及物和不及物动词用。如:
He took off his hat when he entered the office.
他进办公室后脱下帽子。(及物)
The plane took off at seven sharp.
飞机在七点整起飞。(不及物)
45
Charlie rang up Neil to ask about the time of the meeting.
查理打电话给尼尔问开会的时间。(及物)
If you can't come，please ring up and let us know.你如来不了，请来电话告诉我们一声。(不及物)
3. 动词 + 副词 + 介词 短语动词"动词 + 副词"之后有的可以再加一个介词，形成另一种短语动词。这类短语动词用作及物动词。如:
Do not give up hope. We must go on with the experiment
不要失望。我们必须继续试验。(go on with继续)
He came up to me.他走到我跟前。(come up to走近)
这类短语动词还有:look down upon(看不起)，do away with(去掉)，put up with(忍受)等。
4. 动词 + 名词 + 介词 这类短语动词也是及物的。如
He shook hands with all the guests at the banquet.他在宴会上和宾客一一握手。
Young pioneers often come to the Children's Palace to take part in after-school
activities. 少先队员经常到少年宫来参加课外活动。
Pay attention to the road signs. 注意路标。
Her job is taking care of the babies.她的工作是照顾婴儿。
这一类短语动词还有:put an end to (结束)，take notice of (注意)，catch hold of
(抓住)，lose sight of(看不见)，make use of(利用)等
动词的基本形式(Principal Forms of the Verb)
1. 英语动词的四种基本形式 它们是动词原形(room form of the verb)，过去式 (past tense form)， 过去分词 (past participle)和现在分词 (present participle)。这四种形式和助动词一起构成动词的时态、语态和语气。
原形 过去式 过去分词 现在分词
work worked worked working
write wrote written writing
have had had having
do did done doing
2. 动词原形 动词原形就是词典中一般给的动词的形式，如be，have，do，work，study等。
3. 动词过去式和过去分词的构成有规则的和不规则的两种。规则动词(regular verb)的过去式和过去分词，由在原形后面加词尾-ed构成。
[注] 少数双音节动词，尽管重音在第一个音节，仍双写末尾的辅音字母，然后再加-ed。如:
Travel?traveled level?1evelled
total?totaled model?modeled
但美国英语不双写辅音字母，如travel?traveled。
不规则动词(irregular verb)的过去式及过去分词的形式是不规则的。这些动词为数虽不多，但都是比较常用的，必须熟记。不规则动词表见本书附录一。
4. 动词的现在分词 由动词原形加词尾-ing构成。
其构成方法如下:
a)一般情况下，直接加 -ing:
go?going 去 stand?standing站立
46
ask?asking answer?answering回答
study?studying学习 be?being是
see-seeing看
b)以不发音的e结尾的动词，去掉e，再加-ing。如:
come?coming 来 write?writing写
take?taking拿 become?becoming变成
c)动词是闭音节的单音节词，或是以重读闭音节结尾的多音节词，而末尾只有一个辅音字母时，这个辅音字母须双写，然后再加-ing。如:
Sit?sitting坐 run?running跑
Stop?stopping 停止begin?beginning开始
admit?admitting 承认 forget?forgetting忘记
[注一] send，think，accept等动词虽是闭音节或以重读闭音节结尾，但末尾有一个以上的辅音字母，因此，这个辅音字母不双写，应直接加 -ing。如:sending，thinking，accepting。
[注二] 少数双音节的动词，重音在第一音节，仍双写末尾的辅音字母，然后再加-ing。如:
travel?traveling level?leveling
total?-totaling model?modeling
美国英语不双写辅音字母，如travel?traveling。
d)少数几个以-ie止结尾的动词，须将ie变作y，再加ing。如:
die?dying死， tie?tying捆，缚，系
lie?lying躺，说谎
[注]少数以-c结尾的动词变为过去式和现在分词时，须先将-c变为ck,然后再加 -ed或-ing。如:
picnic? picnicked? picnicking ,traffic? trafficked? trafficking
Close Contact with Examination(试题直击)
1. —Are you going to Tibet for vacation? —Yes. I want you to ________ me with some information about it.
A(offer B(give C(show D(provide 【解析】选D
2.—Do you know Tsering Danzhou, a Tibetan ten-year-old boy in Yushu?
--Yes. He ______the people his great help as a translator after the earthquake.
A. provided B. supported C. offered D. afforded
【解析】选C
3.—Angela, you are going to buy a flat here, are you?
--Yes, but I can‘t ________an expensive one.
A. spend B. cost C. pay D. afford 【解析】选D
4.David_____ his friend‘s invitation to the picnic in order to stay at home and have a
good rest.
A. expected B. refused C. received 【解析】选B
5.–How about the exhibition that day?
--It was very noisy, but that didn‘t ________ me.
47
A. hurt B. impress C. change D. bother 【解析】选D
6.Rebuilding in Yushu began soon after the earthquake，and it will long into
the future
A . reach B keep C stop D last 【解析】选D
7.We are all looking forward to_____ more than HK $6,500 for the Ox-farm.
A. raise B. raising C. be raised D. being raised 【解析】选B
8.She saw some boys _____soccer on the playground when she was on the way to the
classroom.
A. played B. to play C. playing
【解析】选C
9.World Expo 2010 Shanghai China _______ people from all over the world to the
theme ―Better City, Better Life.‖
A. attends B. attracts C. allows D. advises
【解析】选B
10.—Why not go on a vacation with us?
--I can‘t _______to take the trip because I put all my money into my company.
A. prefer B. impress C. achieve D. afford
【解析】选D
11. It‘s ________ rather cold. I shall put my jacket on.
A. starting B. looking C. getting D. feeling 【解析】选C
Sorry, sir, I must leave for the airport. The plane will _______ off at 7:30. 12. –
-OK. You can go first.
A. take B. set C. put D. get 【解析】选A
13. This silk dress ________ so smooth. It‘s made in China.
A. tastes B. smells C. sounds D. feels 【解析】选D。本题考查系动词的辨析。根据题意―这件丝绸裙摸起来如此光滑‖可
排除A、B、C三项，选D。
14. The library assistant says I can the magazine for two weeks.
A. borrow B. lend C. buy D. keep 【解析】选D
15. The stones are so heavy. How ________ they ________ to the top of the building
without modern machines?
A. do; lift B. did; lift C. were; lifted 【解析】选B
16. –Can I help you?
-I bought this watch here yesterday, but it ________ work.
A. won‘t B. didn‘t C. doesn‘t D. wouldn‘t
【解析】选C。考查助动词在具体语境中的运用。由前句―I bought this watch here yesterday‖和 关键词but可知―它现在不工作了‖，故排除A、B、D三项，选C。
48
17. The Earth Buildings of Nanjing are so fantastic that they ________ lots of tourists
every year.
A. attract B. allow C. attack D. attend 【解析】选A
18. Doing exercise every day can make you stay healthy. (词语释义)_______
A. live B. keep C. become
【解析】选B。―保持健康‖可以用keep healthy 或stay healthy 来表达。
19.–Do you like the song You and Me?
-Of course! It _______ really beautiful.
A. listens B. sounds C. thinks D. what 【解析】选B
20. Rose _________ her chocolate bar with a friend. Both of them were happy.
A. started B. worked C. shared D. compared
【解析】选C
21. The small child was not old enough to _________ himself.
A. have B. wear C. dress D. put 【解析】选C。考查―穿、戴‖的辨析。wear意为―穿着、戴着‖，用于穿衣服、鞋，
戴帽子、手套、眼镜、手表等，强调穿戴的状态;dress作及物动词时意为―给……
穿衣服‖，其宾语不是衣服而是人;put on―穿上、戴上‖，表示穿的动作。由反身代
词himself可直接选出正确答案。
22. I asked Danny to ________ me my book, but he brought me his book.
A. take B. fetch C. carry D. match
【解析】选B
23. The football team played well, but they didn‘t ________ the competition.
A. score B. do C. succeed D. win 【解析】选D
24. Could you please ________ the floor? It‘s dirty.
A. make B. sweep C. do D. fold 【解析】选B
25. –Yao Ming is getting a lot better than expected.
-But his doctor _________ he shouldn‘t be in a hurry to return to training.
A. imagines B. notices C. wonders D. warns 【解析】选D
49
Unit Seven Tenses时态
Brief introduction简介
英语共有16种时态:其表现形式如下(以study为例)
一般时 进行时 完成时 完成进行时
现在 study be studying have studied have been studying
过去 studied be studying had studied had been studying
将来 will study will be studying will have studied will have been
studying
过去将来would study would be studying would have studied would have
been studying
基础阶段占主体的有8种时态，统归为3类:现在三种，过去三种，将来两种。
Particulars细说:
1 Present Simple Tense一般现在时
, 概念:经常、反复发生的动作或行为及现在的某种状况。
, 时间状语:
always, usually, often, sometimes, every week (day, year, month…), once a week,
on Sundays,
, 基本结构:?be动词;?行为动词 (现在时态)
, 否定形式:?am/is/are+not;?此时态的谓语动词若为行为动词，则在其前加don't,
如主语为第三人称单数，则用doesn't，同时还原行为动词。
, 一般疑问句:?把be动词放于句首;?用助动词do提问，如主语为第三人称单
数，则用does，同时，还原行为动词。
Points for Attention:
(1)一般现在时表示没有时限的持久存在的动作或状态或现阶段反复发生的动作或状
态，常和副词usually，often，always sometimes， regularly，near，occasionally，
every year, every week等连用。
e.g. The moon moves round the earth..
e.g. Mr. Smith travels to work by bus every day. (2)在由after，until，before，once，when，even if，in case，as long as，as soon as，
the moment以及if，unless等引导的时间状语从句或条件状语从句中，通常用一般
现在时表述将来概念。
e.g. I will tell him the news as soon as I see him. e.g. I will not go to countryside if it rains tomorrow. (3)某些表示起始的动词，可用一般现在时表示按规定、计划或安排要发生的动作，
这类动词有:be，go，come，start，depart，arrive，begin，leave等。例如:
e.g. The plane leaves at three sharp.
e.g. The new teachers arrive tomorrow.
e.g. 在由why，what，where，whoever，who，that，as等引导的从句中，也常用一
50
般现在时代表述将来概念。
e.g. Free tickets will be given to whoever comes first.
e.g. You‘ll probably be in the same train as I am tomorrow.
Situations Applicable:
1)表示现在存在的习惯，经常发生的动作或存在的状态。常与every day，twice a week(每周二次)，often (常，往往)，usually(通常)，always(总是)，seldom(很少)，sometimes(有时)等时间状语连用。
e.g. It is sometimes impossible to keep clear of errors.( 误差往往是不可避免的。) e.g. He is seldom at home during the day.( 他白天很少在家。)
2)表示主语的特征、性格、能力等。
e.g. He works hard.他工作很努力。(即:他是一个勤劳的人。)
e.g. He likes to be independent.他独立性很强。(表示性格)
e.g. You draw beautifully. 你画得很好看.(表示能力)
3)表示客观事实或普遍真理。
e.g. Two plus two makes four.(二加二等于四。)
e.g. There are 3,600 seconds in an hour. (一小时有三千六百秒。) e.g. Many a little makes a mickle.(积少成多，聚沙成塔。)
4)表示安排或计划好的将来的动作(一般只限于某些表示移动的动词，如go，come，leave，start等)。
e.g. The train starts at ten o'clock in the morning.( 火车将于上午十点钟开出。) 5)引用书籍报刊或其作者时，一般须用现在一般时。
e.g. Marx says that a foreign language is a weapon in the struggle of life.马克思说外国语是人生斗争的武器。
e.g. 表示在一个具体的现在时间所发生的动作或存在的状态(并非经常发生或存在的状态)
e.g. She is on the danger list, but is much better now.(她曾一度病危，现在好多了。) e.g. What time is it now? 现在是几点钟?
6)某些副词提到句首，句子倒装，语气感叹的场合
e.g. There goes the bell～ 铃响了～(注意there必须在句首)
2. Past Simple Tense一般过去时
概念:过去某个时间里发生的动作或状态;过去习惯性、经常性的动作、行为。 时间状语:ago, yesterday, the day before yesterday, last week(year, night, month…), in 1989, just now, at the age of 5, one day, long long ago, once upon a time, etc.
基本结构:?be动词;?行为动词 (过去时态)
否定形式:?was/were+not;?在行为动词前加didn't，同时还原行为动词。 一般疑问句:?was或were放于句首;?用助动词do的过去式did 提问，同时还原行为动词。
Points for Attention:
1)表示过去某一特定时间所发生的、完成的动作或状态，也可能是过去经常性的。常与表示确切过去时间的词、短语或从句连用。例如:
e.g. We went to the pictures last night and saw a very interesting film.
2) 表示过去习惯性动作。例如:
51
e.g. He always went to class last. e.g. I used to do my homework in the library. (注意与be used to doing短语的区别) e.g. When I was Young I took cold baths regularly.我年轻时常洗冷水浴。(经常性动作)
Situations Applicable:
1)表示过去的动作或状态 常带有如yesterday，two days ago，last week，in l980等时间状语以及由when等连词引导的时间状语从句。
e.g. Linda gave birth to a baby last week.(琳逹上星期生了個宝宝。) e.g. He was wild with delight when he heard the news. (当他听说那消息时欣喜若狂。)
2)叙述过去连续发生的一件件事。
e.g. He got up early in the morning，fetched water，swept the yard and then went out
to work.
(他早上起得很早，打水，扫院，然后去上班。)
3)也可以表示过去一段时间内经常或反复发生的动作。
e.g. When my brother was a teenager，he played table tennis almost everyday.(我弟弟十几岁时，几乎每天都打乒乓球。)
[注] 表示过去经常的或反复的动作，也可以用would加动词原形或用used to加动词原形。
e.g. When he was a child he would go skating every winter.在他还是个孩子时，每年冬天都去滑冰。
e.g. We used to talk for hours about everything under the sun.( 我们过去一聊便是数小时，天底下的事无所不谈。
4)在条件、时间状语从句中表示过去将来的动作。
e.g. They said they would let us know if they heard any news about him.(他们说如果听到什么关于他的消息，就通知我们。)
e.g. He promised me that in every case he would stand behind me.( 他答应我在任何情况下都支持我。)
3. Future Simple Tense一般将来时
, 概念:表示将要发生的动作或存在的状态及打算、计划或准备做某事。 , 时间状语:tomorrow, next day(week, month, year…),soon, in a few minutes,
by…,the day after tomorrow, etc.
, 基本结构:?am/is/are/going to + do;?will/shall + do. , 否定形式:?am/is/are+ not+going to+动词原形; ?will/shall+not动词原形 , 一般疑问句:?be放于句首;?will/shall提到句首。
Points for Attention:
1)表示将来打算进行或期待发生的动作或状态。
e.g. I shall graduate next year. 2)几种替代形式:
a) be going to +动词原形:在口语中广泛使用，表示准备做或将发生的事情。 e.g. I‘m going to buy a house when we‘ve saved enough money.
b) be to +动词原形:表示计划安排要做的事，具有―必要‖的强制性意义。
52
e.g. I am to play tennis this afternoon. c) be about to +动词原形:表示即将发生的事情。
e.g. He was about to start.
f ) be due to +动词原形:表示预先确定了的事，必定发生的事。
e.g. The train is due to depart in ten minutes.
g) be on the point/verge of +动名词:强调即将发生的某种事态。
e.g. Let me leave off writing, for I am on the point of shedding tears. How I miss you
all!
(还是就此停笔吧，要落泪了，真想念你们大家啊～)
Situations Applicable:适用场合:
1)表示将来经常发生的动作。
e.g. We shall work in this factory everyday.我们将每天在这工厂工作。 2) go, come, leave, start等表示移动的动词，可用现在进行时来表示即将发生的动作。 e.g. Please find when the train starts. (请查询一下火车几时开。)
3)若指迹象表明要发生某事，用be going to 而不用will。
e.g. Look at those black clouds. It‘s going to rain. (看那些乌云，要下雨了。)
4. Present Continuous Tense现在进行时
, 概念:表示现阶段或说话时正在进行的动作及行为。
, 时间状语:now, at this time, these days, etc. , 基本结构:am/is/are+doing
, 否定形式:am/is/are+not+doing.
, 一般疑问句:把be动词放于句首。
Points for Attention:要点须知:
1)表示此时此刻或现阶段正在进行的动作。
e.g. They‘re having a meeting. 他们在开会。
e.g. I am talking of possibilities (我是在谈谈可能办到的事情。) 2)表示计划或安排好了的将来动作，常与一个表示将来的时间状语连用。 e.g. He is coming home on Thursday. (他星期四回来。)
e.g. They‘re having a party next week. (下星期他们将开一个晚会。) 注:表示安排将要做的事，人作主语宜用现在进行时，事物作主语，宜用一般现在时。试比较:
e.g. I‘m not going out this evening. 今晚我不准备出去。(不宜说I don‘t…) e.g. The concert starts at 7: 30. 音乐会七点半开始。
3)现在进行时与always, often, forever等连用表示赞扬、厌烦等语气。 e.g. You‘re always interrupting me! 你老打断我的话! (抱怨)
e.g. He is always blowing hot and cold.( 他这人总是喜怒无常。)
4)有些动词不能用进行时，这是一类表示―感觉，感情，存在，从属‖等的动词。如:see，hear，smell，taste，feel， notice，look，appear，(表示感觉的词);hate，love，fear，like，want，wish，prefer，refuse， forgive(表示感情的动词);be，exist，remain，stay，obtain(表示存在状态的动词);have，possess， own，contain，belong，consist of，form(表示占有与从属的动词);understand，know，believe，think，doubt，forget，remember (表示思考理解的动词)。但是如果它们词义改变，便也可用进行时态。
53
e.g. Somebody is looking for you.(有人找你呢。)
5( Past Continuous Tense过去进行时
, 概念:表示过去某段时间或某一时刻正在发生或进行的行为或动作。 , 时间状语:at this time yesterday, at that time或以when引导的谓语动词是一般
过去时的时间状语等。
, 基本结构:was/were+doing
, 否定形式:was/were + not + doing. , 一般疑问句:把was或were放于句首。
Points for Attention:要点须知:
1)表示在过去某一时刻或某一阶段正在发生的动作。
e.g. What were you doing this time yesterday? 昨天这个时候你在做什么, e.g. During the summer of 1999 she was traveling in Europe. 1999年夏天她在欧洲旅行。
2)表示过去将来，多用于go, come, leave, start, take off等动词。 e.g. He said he was leaving for home in a day or two. 他说他一两天之内就动身回家了。
3)表示过去的经常动作，常与always，forever等连用，略带感情色彩。
是想到别人。(赞扬) e.g. She was always thinking of others. 她总
e.g. She was forever complaining. 她老是抱怨。(厌烦)
4)表示某个短暂性动作发生的背景。如果主句谓语和从句谓语都发生在过去，动作时间长的用过去进行时，表达谈话背景;动作时间短的用一般过去时，表达新的信息。
e.g. I was reading the newspaper when the doorbell rang. 我正在看报，突然门铃响了。
e.g. Jim burnt his hand when he was cooking the dinner. 吉姆做饭时把手烫了。 e.g. While I was wondering at this, our schoolmaster took his place. "Children," he
said, "this is the last time that I shall give you a lesson. "
(我正感到纳闷，只见老师登上了讲台，对我们说:―孩子们，这是我最后一次给你们上课了。)
5)表示两个同时持续的动作。
I was doing my homework while he was listening to music. 我在做作业而他在听音乐。
6)过去进行时可以表示客气的语气。如:
I was wondering if you were doing anything on Saturday afternoon?
(不知道你周六下午有空吗?)
6. Present Perfect Tense现在完成时
, 概念:过去发生或已经完成的动作对现在造成的影响或结果，或从过去已经开始，
持续到现在的动作或状态。
, 时间状语:recently, lately, since…for…,in the past few years, etc. , 基本结构:have/has + done
, 否定形式:have/has + not +d one.
54
, 一般疑问句:have或has。
Points for Attention:
(1)现在完成时用来表示对目前状况仍有影响的，刚刚完成的动作(常与yet，already，just连用)，或者过去某一时刻发生的，持续到现在的情况(常与for，since连用)。 e.g. I have just finished my homework. e.g. Mary has been ill for three days. (2)常与现在完成时连用的时间状语有:since, for, during, over等引导出的短语;副词already, yet, just, ever, now, before, often, lately, recently等;状语词组this week (morning, month, year), so far, up to now, many times, up to the present等。例如: a)I haven‘t been there for five years.
b) So far there is no magic bullet for economic woes.( 到目前为止还没有解决经济困难的妙法。)
Situations Applicable:适用场合:
1)表示动作到现在为止已经完成或刚完成，汉语常用"了"或"过"来表示。如:
I have finished my work.我把工作做完了。
We have set up many new factories in this area.我们在这个地区建立了许多新工厂。
She has read all these books.她把这些书都读完了。
2)动作在过去完成，表示"经验"或"结果"。汉语常用"过"来表示。如:
Have you ever seen the play A Doll's House? 你看过话剧《玩偶之家》吗?
Yes，I have seen it twice.我看过两遍了。
I have learnt to drive.我学过开车。
The man has lived in China.那人在中国住过。
[注] 注意be在下面句子中的意义。如:
Where have you been? -I've been to the laboratory.你上哪儿去了?--到实验室去了。
Have you ever been to Hangzhou? ,No，I've never been there.你到过杭州吗?--没到过。
How have you been?-I've been well thank you.你近来身体好吗?--谢谢你，我近来很好。
现在完成时与过去一般时的区别
现在完成时和过去一般时都表示在过去完成的动作，但现在完成时强调这一动作与现在的关系，如对现在产生的结果、影响等，而过去一般时则表示动作发生在过去，一般不表示和现在的关系。试比较:
1)I have lost my pen.我把钢笔丢了。(意即还没找到，现在我没有笔用。)
She lost her pen yesterday.她昨天把笔丢了。(笔是昨天丢的，现在找到与否，没有说明。)
2)I have been to the Agricultural Exhibition.我看过这个农业展览会。(强调我知道它的内容)
I went to the Agricultural Exhibition last week.我上周参观了这个农业展览会。(只说明我上周参观过展览会这件事)
3) Who has opened the door? 谁把门开了?(现在门还开着)
55
Who opened the door? 谁开的门?(指过去，与现在无关。现在门是关着还是开着，没有说明。)
4) A:Have you had your lunch? 你吃过年饭没有?(意即你现在不饿吗?)
B:Yes，I have.吃了。(意即我现在饱了，不要再吃了。)
A:When did you have it 你什么时候吃的?(说话人感兴趣的是"吃"这一动作发生在什么时候。)
B:I had it about half an hour ago.我是大约半小时前吃的。
现在完成时的其他用法
1)还可表示动作发生在过去，并且一直延续到现在，甚至还可能继续延续下去。这时常和since所引导的短语或从句或for引导的短语连用(for有时可以省去)。
How long have you been in Beijing ? -I have been in Beijing for four years.你在北京呆了多久?--我在北京呆了四年。
Isaac's father has been a school teacher since 1968. 艾萨克的父亲从一九六八年以来就当教师。
We haven't had a vacation for a long time.我们好久没放假了。
Three years have passed since we left school.我们毕业已经三年了。
[注]但在下面的句子中，主句的谓语动词可以用现在一般时。如:
It is three years since he began to work on the farm.他在这农场工作已经三年了。(美国英语用has been，下例同此)
It's a long time since I saw you last.好久没见了。
2)在条件、时间状语从句中表示将来完成的动作。
I'll go with you when I have finished my home work，我做完作业后就和你一块去。
We'll wait here until you have written the letter.我们将在这里等你写完信。
Perhaps I'll know more English after I have learnt it for two years.我学完两午后，懂的英语或许就会多些了。
现在完成时的时间状语问题:
1) 现在完成时说明的是现在的情况，是现在时态，因此不能和表示过去时间的状语如yesterday，1asr month，three years ago，in l960等连用。这些时间状语只能和过去时态连用，表示过去的动作。但现在完成时可和表示过去时间的副词just和before连用。如:
He has just come.他刚到。
We have seen the movie before，我们以前看过这个电影
2) 现在完成时常和表示不确定的时间的副词already，never，ever，always，yet，not...yet，often等连用。如:
Have you ever been in a plane? 你坐过飞机吗?
The new books have not arrived yet.新书还没有到。
The Nansha lslands have always been Chinese territory.南沙群岛一直是中国的领土。
Have you heard from him yet? 你接到他的信了吗?
They have already finished their experiment.他们已经做完试验了。
Many westerners have never seen a giant panda.许多西方人从没见过大熊猫。
56
We have often been to the Summer Palace.我们常到颐和园去玩。
3)现在完成时可以和包括"现在"在内的时间状语连用，如now，today，this month，this year等。如:
We have planted many fruit trees this year.我们今年种了很多果树。
Have you seen Benny today? 你今天见到本尼了吗?
We've had a lot of rain this summer.今年夏天雨下得很多。
但如说话人所感兴趣的只是在这段时间内发生了某一动作，而不是这一动作与现在的关系时，须用过去时态。如:
The conference opened this month.会议是本月开幕的。
He set up a stand on the pedlars' market.. 他在集贸市场上设了个摊位。
现在完成时可和疑问副词where，why，how连用，但通常不和疑问副词when连用
(when一般只与过去时态连用)。如:
Where have you been? 你去哪儿了?(询问经过情况。如说Where did you go?则只问地点)
Why have you turned off the radio? 你干吗把收音机关了?(强调和现在的关系，意即收音机关着。如说Why did you turn off the radio?则强调关收音机这一过去的动作。)
Past Perfect Tense过去完成时 7.
, 概念:以过去某个时间为标准，在此以前发生的动作或行为，或在过去某动作之
前完成的行为，即―过去的过去‖。
, 时间状语:before, by the end of last year(term, month…),etc. , 基本结构:had + done.
, 否定形式:had + not + done.
, 一般疑问句:had放于句首。
Points for Attention:要点须知:
(1) 表示过去某时间前已经发生的动作或情况，这个过去的时间可以用by，before等介词短语或一个时间状语从句来表示;或者表示一个动作在另一个过去动作之前已经完成。例如:
We had just had our breakfast when Tom came in.
By the end of last year they had turned out 5, 000 bicycles.
(2) 动词expect, hope, mean, intend, plan, suppose, wish, want, desire等用过去完成时，表示过去的希望、预期、意图或愿望等没有实现。例如:
I had meant to take a good holiday this year, but I wasn‘t able to get away.
另外两种表示―过去想做而未做的事‖的表达方式是:
1)was / were + to have done sth,例如:
We were to have come yesterday, but we couldn‘t.
2) intended (expected, hope, meant, planned, supposed, wished, wanted, desired)
+ to have done sth,例如:
I meant to have told you about it, but I forgot to do so.
(3) 过去完成时常用于以下固定句型:
1)hardly, scarcely, barely + 过去完成时+ when + 过去时。例如:
57
Hardly had I got on the bus when it started to move.
2)no sooner +过去完成时+ than +过去时。例如:
No sooner had I gone out than he came to see me.
3)by (the end of ) +过去时间，主句中谓语动词用过去完成时。例如:
The experiment had been finished by 4 o‘clock yesterday afternoon.
Situations Applicable:适用场合:
1 先后发生的一系列动作，但并不强调先后时，最后两个动词用then，and，but 等连接。如:
On Saturday afternoon, Mrs Green went to the market, bought some bananas
and visited her cousin. 星期六下午，格林夫人去了市场，买了些香蕉，然后去看望了她的表姐。
2 两个动作是紧接着发生的，可用一般过去时。如:
When I heard the news, I was very excited. 我听到那个消息时，非常高兴。
3 叙述历史事实，可用一般过去时。如:
Our teacher told us that Columbus discovered America in 1492. 我们老师告诉我们哥伦布于1492年发现了美洲。
4表示从过去某一时刻开始一直延续到另一过去时刻的动作或状态。跟现在完成时一样，也常与 how long, for three days, before 等表示一段时间的状语连用。如:
When Jack arrived he learned Mary had been away for almost an hour. 当杰克到来时，他才了解到玛丽已经离开差不多一个小时了。
5表示未曾实现的希望或打算。表示希望或打算的动词，如hope, want, expect,
think, suppose, plan, mean, intend等的过去完成时，后接不定式to do时，表示未曾实现的希望或打算，即―本来希望或打算做某事(但却没做) ‖。如:
I had hoped to send him a Christmas card，but I forgot to do so. 我本来希望寄给他一张圣诞卡的，但我忘了寄了。
I had intended to come over to see you last night，but someone called and I
couldn‘t get away. 昨晚我本想去看你的，但有人来了我走不开。
8. Past Future Tense过去将来时
, 概念:立足于过去某一时刻，从过去看将来，常用于宾语从句中。 , 时间状语:the next day(morning, year…),the following month(week…),etc. , 基本结构:?was/were/going to + do;?would/should + do. , 否定形式:?was/were/not + going to + do;?would/should + not + do.
一般疑问句:?was或were放于句首;?would/should 提到句首。
Points for Attention:要点须知:
过去将来时由would, was/were going to, was/were to was/were about to等加动词原形构成, 也可由was/were on the point of加动名词构成。
I knew you would agree. 我知道你会同意的。
I said I would arrange everything. 我说我来安排一切。
注:在过去将来时中，所有人称都用would，尤其在口语中。只有个别情况才用should。如:
We knew we should win. 我知道我们会赢。
58
I told her that I was leaving soon. 我告诉她我们很快就要离开。
We were to have been married last year. 我们本来打算去年结婚的。
When we arrived, the train was just going to start. 我们到达时，火车正要启动。
I was about to leave when the telephone rang. 我正在离开，电话铃响了。
I was on the point of going when you came in. 我正要出去你来了。
The talk was due to last for three days. 会谈将进行三天。
以上仅属于基础时态介绍，更多详情请参看“16种时态补识”。
Close Contact with Examination:(试题直击)
1. We ________ to move but are still considering where to go to.
A. are deciding B. decided C. have decided D. had decided 2. I left my pen on the desk and now it‘s gone; who ________ it?
A. took B. has taken C. will take D. had taken 3. They won‘t buy any new clothes because they ________ money to buy a new car.
A. save B. were saving C. have saved D. are saving 4. I ________ your last point — could you say it again?
A. didn‘t quite catch B. don‘t quite catch C. hadn‘t quite catch D. can‘t quite catch
–Are you a teacher? 5.
–I ________, but now I am working in a company.
A. is B. am C. was D. had
6. I feel sure I ________ her somewhere before.
A. was to meet B. have met C. had met D. would meet 7. –Does Liu Hui serve in the army?
–No, but he ________ in the army for three years.
A. served B. has served C. is serving D. would serve 8. –Tom came back home yesterday.
–Really? Where ________ at all?
A. had he been B. has he been C. had he gone D. has he gone 9. Unfortunately, when I dropped in, Professor Smith ________, so we only had time
for a few words.
A. has just left B. had just left C. just left D. was just leaving 10. –I‘m sorry; I shouldn‘t have been so rude to you.
–You ________ your temper but that‘s OK.
A. have lost B. had lost C. did lose D. were losing 11. –You must have met him the other day.
–Oh, no, I ________.
A. hadn‘t B. mustn‘t C. haven‘t D. didn‘t
12. –Will you go to the park now?
–Not until I ________ my physics exercises.
A. will finish B. have finished C. will have finished D. had finished
13. –Did you enjoy the film?
–Yes, it‘s the best one I ________ these years.
59
A. had B. have had C. had had D. would have
14. –Did Alan enjoy seeing his old friends yesterday?
–Yes, he did. He ________ his old friends for a long time.
A. didn‘t see B. wouldn‘t see C. hasn‘t seen D. hadn‘t seen
15. When I called you this morning, nobody answered the phone. Where ________?
A. did you go B. have you gone C. were you D. had you been 16. She ought to stop working; she has a headache because she ________ too long.
A. has been reading B. had read C. is reading D. read 17. –Why do you look worried?
–Fred left the company half an hour ago. His work ________ unfinished since.
A. left B. was left C. has left D. has been left
18. –You could have asked Mr Johnson for help. He is kind-hearted.
–I ________ that. A whole day ________.
A. forget; wastes B. forgot; was wasted C. forgot; had wasted D. forget; was wasted
19. You‘d better not phone the manager between 7 and 8 tomorrow evening; he ________ an important meeting then.
A. will have B. would have C. will be having D. will have had 20. –I‘m sorry, but the boss isn‘t here yet. Shall I have him call you when he comes back?
–No, I‘ll call him back. If I call again in half an hour, do you think she ________ ?
A. had arrived B. has arrived C. will arrive D. will have arrived 21. –What‘s wrong with your coat?
–Just now when I wanted to get off the bus, the man next to me ________on it.
A. sat B. had sat C. had been sitting D. was sitting 22. –Why weren‘t you at the meeting?
–I ________ for a long-distance call from my aunt in America.
A. waited B. was waiting C. had been waiting D. had waited 23. –Will you attend the meeting this evening?
–But I ________ told anything about it.
A. wasn‘t B. am not C. haven‘t been D. won‘t be
24. – What did you think of Act I of the play last night?
–I‘m sorry. The play ________ when I got there.
A. had been started B. had been on for half an hour
C. was to start D. had begun for half an hour
25. –Why did you come by bus?
–My car broke down yesterday evening and I ________ it repaired.
A. didn‘t have B. don‘t have C. won‘t have D. haven‘t had
【答案与解析】
1. C。用现在完成时表示影响，即指现在已经作出决定。
2. B。用现在完成时表示影响或结果，即现在笔不见了，是由于某人已经把它拿
走了的结果。
3. D。用现在进行时表示现在正在进行的动作。
60
4. A。从下文的语境看，既然现在叫对方重复一遍，说明―没听清对方的最后一点‖应发生在过去(即说此话之前)。
5. C。这时用一般过去时表示过去曾经是老师，但现在不是了。
6. B。before 用作副词时不与具体时间连用，泛指―以前‖，通常与一般过去时或现在完成时连用。
7. A。由no是对前句的否定可知现在不在部队服役，是以前―服过役‖，故用一般过去时。
8. A。have been to…去过某地(已回来)，have gone to…到某地去了(没回来);又因为问的是Tom回来之前到去过某地，故用过去完成时态。
9. D。从―我们只谈了几句话‖可知，当我们去拜访时，Professor Smith―正要‖离开了，D是过去进行时表示过去将来意义。
10. C。上句―我本不该对你那么无礼‖是对过去情况的自责，答语―你当时的确很生气‖，用一般过去时，did 在 lose 前表示强调。
11. D。问句是对过去情况的猜测，所以答句用一般过去时。I didn‘t是I didn‘t meet him the other day 的省略。
12. B。因为在时间状语从句中要用一般现在时代替一般将来时。若强调从句动作发生在主句动作之前时，用现在完成时代替将来完成时，本题属后一种情况。
13. B。因为 these years 是包括现在在内的，故用现在完成时。
14. D。由于见朋友发生在过去(即昨天)，而很久没有见到朋友自然是昨天的见面之前，即属于过去的过去，故用过去完成时。
15. C。句子的前半句说上午打电话时没有人接电话，而后半句问对方当时在什么地方。显然，句子前后两部分的时间应一致，即用一般过去时。
16. A。从第一句话She ought to stop working 可知―他仍然在学习‖，故后面用现在完成进行时态。
17. D。受前一句left的影响，易误选B。题干中的since说明此处应用现在完成时态。从问句中也可看出来，此处强调动作对现在的影响，故要用现在完成时的被动式。
18. B。说话之前―忘了‖，故用一般过去时态;第二空应用一般过去时的被动语态形式。
19. C。指将来某时或某段时间正发生的事用将来进行时。
20. D。一般将来时表示将要发生的动作，而将来完成时表示将来某个时间之前已经发生或完成的动作。根据语境可知是强调将来的结果，应用将来完成时。
21. C。意思是:刚才我想下公共汽车时，(我才发现)靠近我坐的那个人一直坐在我的外衣上。表示从过去某一时刻开始一直延续到另一过去时间仍在进行的动作或状态用过去完成进行时。
22. B。该题考查根据语境选用正确时态题。上句说―你为什么没去参加会议‖，据此回答―我当时正在等我姑姑从美国打来的长途电话‖，说的是―你们开会时‖我正在等一个电话。
23. C。指到目前为止还没有人把这件事通知我。相当于在后面省略了so far。
24. B。句意:戏剧在我到达之前就已上演了半小时，即表示―过去的过去‖，且短暂性动词不与持续性时间连用，故须将 start?be on 才可与持续性时间连用。
25. D。从昨天坏了一直到今天来时还没有修好，表示从过去某一时刻开始一直延缓到现在的动作或状态要作现在完成时态。
61
Unit Eight Infinitive and Gerund动词不定式和动名词
Part one Infinitive动词不定式
Tense and Voice
时态\语态 主动 被动
一般式 to do to be done
进行式 to be doing *****
完成式 to have done to have been done
完成进行式 to have been doing ***** 1. 现在时:一般现在时表示的动词，有时与谓语动词表示的动作同时发生，有时发生在谓语动词的动作之后。
He seems to know this.
I hope to see you again. = I hope that I'll see you again. 我希望再见到你。 2. 完成时:表示的动作发生在谓语动词表示的动作之前。
I'm sorry to have given you so much trouble.
He seems to have caught a cold. 3. 进行时: 表示动作正在进行，与谓语动词表示的动作同时发生。
He seems to be eating something. 4. 完成进行时:
She is known to have been working on the problem for many years.
Grammatical Function
不定式的语法功能
不定式虽然不能做谓语，但保留着动词的特征，可带有自己的宾语和状语，从而形成不定式短语。不定式短语具有名词、形容词及副词的性质，可做主语、宾语、宾语补足语、表语、同位语、定语及状语等句子成分。
不定式做主语
1. 英语中，不定式短语可放在句首充当句子的主语。如:
To learn English well is very important. 学好英语很重要。
2. 但为了使句子平衡，常用it做形式主语放在句首，而将真正的主语——不定式放到句末，特别是在疑问句及感叹句中必须采用这种方式。如:
It is very important to learn English well. 学好英语很重要。
Is it necessary to bring an umbrella today? 今天带雨伞有必要吗, 3. 不定式做主语时，不能有单独的名词或代词做逻辑主语，而应用for sb. /of sb. 做它的逻辑主语，当不定式表示对逻辑主语的利害关系时，用for sb;当不定式用来对逻辑主语表示赞美或责备时，用of sb。如:
It is not good for your eye to read in the sun. 在阳光下看对你的眼睛不好。
It is very kind of you to help us. 你来帮助我们，真是太好了。
不定式做宾语
1. 在英语中，不定式可用来做宾语。如:
62
He agrees to go with us. 他同意跟我们一起去。
I want to buy a Chinese-English dictionary. 我想买一本汉英词典。 2. 不定式做宾语时须注意:
1) 不定式并不是可做任何及物动词的宾语。能接不定式做宾语的动词有:afford, agree, arrange, ask, attempt, begin, care, choose, continue, dare, decide, desire,
demand, determine, elect, expect, fail, hate, hesitate, hope, intend, know, learn, like,
long, love, manage, mean, need, offer, plan, prepare, promise, pretend, prefer, refuse,
require, start, try, wait, want, wish, wonder. 如:
I can‘t afford to buy such an expensive computer. 我买不起这么昂贵的电脑。
He decided to work in that factory. 他决定去那家工厂工作。
2) 做宾语的不定式如果带有自己的补足语，则须用it做形式宾语，而将真正的宾语置于补足语之后。如:
Do you think it necessary to master a foreign language? 你认为掌握一门外语有必要吗,
I find it interesting to stay with you. 我发觉与你呆在一起很有趣。
3) 不定式一般不做介词的宾语，但可做介词but, except的宾语，并且，当but, except前面如果有动词do时，不定式的to须省略。如:
He said nothing except to go away. 他一句话没说就走了。
Now we can‘t do anything but wait for him. 现在我们只能等待他。
不定式做宾语补足语
不定式做宾语的补足语须从三个方面来掌握。
1. 动词接动词不定式做宾语的补足语时，不定式的to不能省略。这样的动词有:advise, allow, ask, beg, cause, encourage, expect, force, forbid, get, help, order,
permit, persuade, require, teach, tell, want, wish, warn, call on, wait for, long for。如:
The teacher advised us to learn through experiment. 老师劝我们通过实验来学习。
They didn‘t allow us to enter the hall. 他们不允许我们进入大厅。
2. 动词接动词不定式做宾语的补足语时，不定式的to须省略。这样的动词有:have, let, make, feel, hear, notice, see, watch, observe ，但它们变为被动语态时，不定式的to不能省略。如
The boss made the workers work over ten hours a day in the past.
? The workers were made to work over ten hours a day by the boss. 过去老板使
工人们每天工作十多个小时。
I saw Li Lei fall down from his bike.
?Li Lei was seen to fall down from his bike. 我看见李蕾从单车上摔了下来。 3. 动词help接动词不定式做宾语的补足语时，不定式的to可省略也可不省略。如:
He often comes to help us (to) do some farming work. 他经常来帮我们干农活。
不定式做表语
1. 不定式短语可用来做系动词的表语。如:
My hope is to become a scientist like Einstein. 我的希望就是做一个像爱因斯坦那样的科学家。
My job is to teach English. 我的工作就是教英语。
63
2. 不定式做表语时须注意两点:
1) 一般说来，不定式前面的to不能省略，但当主语部分含有动词do时，to须省略。如:
What I want is to visit the History Museum now. 我所想的就是现在去参观历史博物馆。
What he wants to do is go swimming in that river. 他想做的事就是去河里游泳。 2) 不定式的逻辑主语是句子的主语时，表示主语的责任、义务或将来的行为;当不定式的逻辑主语不是句子的主语时，不定式是表语，表示主语的内容或性质。如:
We are to keep the order in the street. 我们将去街上维持秩序。(将来时)
Our job is to keep the order in the street. 我们的工作是维持街上的秩序。(系表结构)
不定式做定语
1. 不定式做定语时，一般放在所修饰的名词、代词之后，表示即将发生的动作。如:
We have much work to do. 我们有很多事情要做。
I have a letter to answer. 我有一封信要回复。
2. 不定式做定语时，中心词与不定式的关系:
1)主谓关系，即:中心词是不定式的逻辑主语。如:
She was the first student to come into the classroom this morning. 今天早晨她是第一个到教室的学生。
Lucy was the very girl to meet you. 露西正是来接你的那个女孩子。 2)动宾关系，即:中心词是不定式的逻辑宾语。如:
Do you have anything to do now? 你现在有事情要做吗,
I have some clothes to wash. 我有些衣服要洗。
当不定式与所修饰的中心词有动宾关系时，不定式中的动词须为及物动词，若是不及物动词，不定式后须加上适当的介词。如:
Go ahead, please. I have a friend to wait for here. 请先走吧，我还有个朋友要在这儿等。
3)说明关系，即:不定式是中心词的内容。如:
I had a dream to fly in the sky like a bird. 我做了一个像鸟儿在天上飞的梦
He has a wish to go to college. 他有一个上大学的愿望。
不定式做状语
不定式做状语，可表示动作的目的、结果、原因、条件和方式。 1. 表目的
表目的时，不定式可放在句子的前面也可放在句子的末尾。但在句子前面时，不定式常与句子用逗号隔开;而在句子末尾时一般不用逗号隔开。如:
To get there on time, we set out at five in the morning. 为了按时到达那儿，我们早晨五点就出发了。
He goes there to enjoy the fresh air. 他去那儿享受那儿的新鲜空气。 比较:to do, in order to do, so as to do都可表示目的，但to do, in order to do的位置既可在句首，又可在句末;而so as to do只能在句末。
In order to build a house, he bought some wood and steel yesterday.
?He bought some wood and steel yesterday in order to build a house.
64
?He bought some wood and steel yesterday so as to build a house.
2. 表结果
不定式在下列结构中表示谓语动作的结果，不定式的位置一般在句子末尾。 1) 表示终结性的动词find, see, hear, learn, discover的不定式，常表示出乎意料的结果，并且，不定式前常有never, only等副词修饰。如:
I hurried to the railway station yesterday, (only) to find that the train had left. 昨天我急急忙忙赶到火车站时，发现火车已经开走了。
I went to the classroom, only to discover it empty. 我走到教室，结果发现教室是空的。
2) 在 ―so + adj. / adv. + as + to do‖中。如:
The scenery is so beautiful as to attract many people here every year. 这儿景色非常美，每年都要吸引很多人来这里。
3) 在 ―adj. / adv. + enough + to do‖中。如:
He ran fast enough to catch up with Li Lei. 他跑得很快，结果赶上了李蕾。 4) 在 ―so + adj. / adv. +a(n) + n. + as + to do‖中。如:
This is so interesting a story as to interest children. 这是个很有趣的故事，使孩子们非常感兴趣。
5) 在 ―such + adj. / adv. + n. + as + to do‖中。如:
She is such a good girl to help you make great progress. 她是个非常好的姑娘，帮助你取得了很大的进步。
6) 在 ―too + adj. / adv. + to do‖中。如:
They went too slowly to catch the early bus. 他们走得太慢了，结果没能赶上早班车。
3. 表原因
不定式表示原因时，一般放在句子的末尾，说明主语某种心情、情感(glad, pleased, sad,
worried, sorrow, excited) 所产生的原因。如:
I‘m very glad to hear that Li Lei has been elected secretary of the Party. 听说李蕾被选为了党的书记，我很高兴。
4. 表条件
不定式表示条件时，一般放在句首。如:
To be heated, liquid will change into gas. 如果受热，液体就会变成气体。 5. 表方式
不定式可接在as if / as though之后表示方式时，如:
He moved his mouth as if to say something. 他的嘴唇动了动，好像要说什么事似的。
不定式做同位语
不定式可用作同位语，说明某些名词或代词task, idea, thought的内容。不定式做同位语时，在名词或代词与不定式之间常用逗号隔开。如:
Suddenly I got the idea, to view the problem from a different angle.
突然，我有了这个想法:试试换个角度来考虑一下这个问题。
不定式做独立成分
To tell you the truth, I don‘t like it. 告诉你实话，我不喜欢它。
不定式常用句型:※
65
1. It is + up to sb. + to do sth. 做某事是某人的责任或义务
It‘s up to us to give them all the help we can.我们理应竭尽所能地给予他们帮助。
It is up to you to decide whether to take the job or not.是否接受这项工作，由你来
决定。
2. It is + time + for sb. to do sth 到……时间了; 该到……了
It is time for us to get down to our work.
I think it is time for us to realize the importance of protecting the environment and
to do something about it, such as planting trees, growing grass and so on. 3. have no time to do sth.没有时间做某事
Mother‘s day is coming. It‘s time to think of a proper gift for my mother, one that
won‘t be expensive but will make her happy.
4.have no choice/alternative/option but to do 别无选择
That was so serious a matter that I had no choice but to call in the police. 那件事事关重大，我别无选择，只好请警察来。
5(there is no need to do sth. 没有必要做某事
There is no need to worry. Everything will just go fine.
Since you have repaired my TV set, there is no need for me to buy a new one. 6. need to do sth.需要做某事
You didn‘t need to hurry, because we had much time left.我们不必赶的，因为我
们还剩很多时间。
7. make it a rule/ practice/point to do sth.做……习以为常
You should make it a rule to leave things where you can find them.
你应该养成习惯，将自己的物品放在自己能找的地方。
8. used to do sth.过去常常做某事
He used to take a walk after supper when he was in the countryside.
The shelf used to be used to hold those old books.
A: Have you got used to working this kind of computer?
B: Not yet, because I used to use the abacus before.
9. do something to do 采取措施做某事
The government is trying to do something to prevent the environment being polluted.
Now many ways have been taken to prevent the water from being polluted. 10. spare no pains/efforts to do不遗余力做某事
We decided to spare no efforts to carry out the plan.
11. be all out to do sth.全力以赴做某事
A: May I have a talk with one of the reporters?
B: I‘m sorry, but they are all out to cover the main events.
12. The last + n. + to do 最不可能的……
I would be the last (person) to do such a foolish thing.我绝不会做如此愚蠢的事
情。
13(be welcome to do sth.欢迎某人做某事
She is welcome to stay here whenever she likes.欢迎她随时到这里住。
You are welcome to use my car any time.你不必客气可随时用我的车。
14. go on to do sth.接着做另外一件事
66
After finishing the words , they went on to go over the text.结束单词后，他们接着通课文。
15. manage to do sth.设法做成了某事
By helping each other they managed to overcome the difficulties.通过互相帮助，他们终于克服了困难。
16. pay to do sth.值得做某事
It pays to follow his advice.听他的忠告是值得的。
It always pays to give your paper one final check写了一篇文章最后检查一遍总是有好处的。
17.it is like sb. to do sth.像……才会
It was (just) like him to think of helping her.像他这样的人才会想到帮助他。
It is not like her to be so late.向她这样的人一般不会这么晚。
18. have something to do 有事要做
Excuse me for interrupting. I have something to tell you. 对不起，打扰了。我有事要告诉你。
19. it is better to do sth.
It would be better to do sth.是表建议的客气句型
It is better to give than to receive.给予总比接受好。/ 奉献比索取好。
As the saying goes: ―It is better to get wisdom than gold,‖ because wisdom is more
precious than wealth. 常言道:―得智慧胜似得金子‖，因为智慧比财富更宝贵。
It is better to get wisdom than gold.得智慧胜似得金子。
Maybe it would be better to choose the red one.
20(in an attempt to do sth试图(做)
in an effort to do sth.努力(做),在干好某事的努力过程当中。
Ten hours has passed after the explosion in the mine, but rescue efforts to recover
the missing are still being carried on. She failed in her attempt to swim the English Channel. 她横度英吉利海峡的尝试失败了
In their efforts to learn English well, they spend a lot of time.
Part Two Gerund动名词
Tense and Voice
动名词的时态分一般式和完成式两种，语态分主动形式和被动形式。 一般式的主动语态:V+ing
一般式的被动语态:being+ P.P
完成式的主动语态:having+ P.P
完成式的被动语态:having been+P.P
动名词的一般式所表示的动作可以与谓语动作同时，也可在谓语动作之前或之后，有时可能没有明确的先后关系。例如:
1. 没有明确的先后关系。例如:
Seeing is believing. 眼见为实。
67
Being careless is not a good habit. 粗心不是一个好习惯。
His job is not only to dispose of problems but (also) to meet unexpected challenges.
他的工作不仅要处理难题而且也要应付突来的挑战。
Finding work is difficult these days. 现在找工作可不容易。
2. 与谓语动作同时发生。例如:
He kept smiling. 他不停地笑。
We had a good time in dancing with them. 我们同他们跳舞玩得很开心。 3. 发生在谓语动作之前。例如:
I apologize for not having kept my promise( 我为没能遵守诺言表示歉意。 He was praised for having made such a contribution to the country(他因对国家做了这样大的贡献而受到表扬。
After reading your letter I knew what had happened. 看了你的信后我就知道出什么事了。
4. 发生在谓语动作之后。例如:
He suggested bringing out a new type of bike. 他建议生产一种新型的自行车。 I am thinking of going to the Industrial Exhibition this afternoon( 我想下午去看工业展览。
Would you mind opening the window?把窗户打开好吗?
动名词一般式的被动语态
No one enjoys being made fun of in public.没人愿意当众被取笑。 He hated being treated like a child.他讨厌象对待小孩那样对待他。
动名词完成式
动名词的动作发生在谓语动词所表示的动作之前,这时通常用动名词的完成时态。 She denied having stolen anything(她否认偷过任何东西。
I have no idea of their having done such a thing. 我不知道他们做过那样的事。 I don‘t remember having met him before. 我记不得以前见过他。 Thank you for having taking so much trouble to help. 谢谢你费力帮忙。 I am very pleased at your having been honored with a medal. 我很高兴你能获得奖牌。
Tony was very unhappy for not having been invited to the party.托尼不高兴是因为没有被邀请参加聚会。
He did not admit having done anything wrong.他不承认做过错事。 动名词完成式的被动语态
Do you remember having been sent such an e-mail?你记得曾经给你寄过这样一封电子邮件吗,
The house showed no sign of having been damaged.这栋房子没有已经受损的迹象。 He prided himself on having never been beaten in chess.他为下棋从未被击败而自豪。
Grammatical Function语法功能
动名词是非谓语动词的一种，它由动词原形加-ing构成，形式上与现在分词相同。动名词除具有动词性质外，还具有名词的性质。动名词在句中可用作主语、表语、宾语、定语、宾语补足语等
68
动名词用作主语
Saving is getting. 节约即增收。
Being lost can be a terrifying experience. 迷路有时很可怕。
【注】动名词作主语时，有时可用it作形式主语:
It‘s hard work climbing mountains. 爬山是费劲的事。
It‘s fun being taken to the zoo. 被带去逛动物园很有意思。
用it代替动名词作形式主语的两个常用句型:
It‘s no use saying any more about it. 再谈这事没有用。
Is it any good trying to explain? 试图作些解释有用吗?
动名词用作表语
My favorite sport is swimming. 我最喜欢的运动是游泳。
His job is producing publicity for the child welfare organization.
他的任务是为儿童福利组织撰写宣传材料。
Seeing is believing. 眼见为实。
【注】不定式和动名词均可用作主语和表语，两者的区别是:动名词多指笼统的、抽象的概念，而不定式则多表示具体的、一次性的动作。
用作宾语
Excuse me for coming late. 对不起我来晚了。
Most students enjoy asking questions in English. 多数学生都喜欢用英语提问。 【注】动词用作介词宾语时，通常只用动名词形式，而不用不定式形式，典型的例外是表示―除外‖的except和but(它们后接动词作宾语时通常用不定式)。 动名词用作宾语补足语
Can we call this serving mankind? 这能叫为人类服务吗,
I call this robbing Peter to pay Paul. 我管这叫做拆东墙补西墙。 【注】动名词用作宾语补足语时，主要动词通常是call。
动名词用作定语
We need a new working method. 我们需要一种新的工作方法。
The doctor told me not to take sleeping pills. 医生叫我不要服安眠药。 【注】与不定式和现在分词作定语不同，动名词作定语不以短语的形式出现，而且总是位于被修饰名词之前(在许多情况下构成合成名词)，用以表示被修饰名词的用途、目的和场合:
reading room 阅览室 operating table 手术台
swimming pool游泳池 singing competition歌咏比赛
drinking water饮用水 washing machine洗衣机
不定式与动名词的对比:
作主语
1.不定式与动名词均可作主语，两者常可换用。例如:
Cleaning the playground / To clean the playground is her full-time job. 打扫操场的卫生是她的专职工作。
69
To watch / Watching them play football is very interesting. 看他们踢足球是很有趣的。
2. 注意前后一致的原则，如主语是不定式或动名词，表语也用不定式或动名词。例如:
To see her is to love her.谁看见她都会喜欢她。
Saving is having. 节约即是收入。
3. 但如果作主语的不定式是固定的说法，或表示一种强烈的对比，或指具体的某次动作等时，通常不用动名词代替不定式。例如:
To love others is to be loved. 爱人即爱己。(表示对比)
To learn a language in one month is impossible. 在一个月内学会一门语言是不可能的。(表示某次具体的动作)
作表语
1. 不定式和动名词均可作表语，解释或说明主语的具体内容，两者常可换用，但需要注意主语与表语的一致性。例如:
My work is looking after / to look after the children.我的工作是照看这些孩子。
To live is to do something worthwhile. 活着就是要做一些有价值的事情。(比较:Living is doing something worthwhile.) 2. 如果表示某种结果、不幸的命运或预言，或表示"同意;命令;决定;劝告"等意，则往往用不定式作表语。例如:
The important thing is to save lives. 救人要紧。
You are to hand in the exercises tomorrow. 你们必须明天交练习。
作宾语
1. 有些动词后可接动名词作宾语，但不可接不定式作宾语;有些动词则反之。详细内容见本报第1期第1面"动词不定式过关指导"。
2. begin, start, hate, like, love, prefer 等动词后接不定式与接动名词区别不大，但这类动词与 should 或 would 连用时，只接不定式;begin 或 start 用于进行时态时，后面常常接不定式。例如:
I don't like troubling / to trouble him. 我不想去麻烦他。
Would you like to leave a message? 你要不要留个话儿?
3. 某些动词后接动名词与接不定式意义不同。这类动词常用的有 remember, forget,
regret, stop, try, mean 等。如 remember, forget 后接不定式表示未发生的动作，接动名词表示已发生的动作;regret 后接不定式表示"遗憾;抱歉"，常与 to say, to tell,
to inform 等连用, 后接动名词指对已发生的事表示"后悔或悔恨";stop to do sth. 表示"停下来去做某事", stop doing sth. 表示"停止做某事";try to do sth. 表示"试图做某事"，try doing sth. 表示"试试做某事";mean to do sth. 表示"有意或打算做某事", mean doing sth. 表示"意味着……"。例如:
I remember seeing you somewhere in Guilin.我记得在桂林的什么地方见到过你。(seeing 这个动作已经发生)
Remember to mail the letter for me. 记住帮我寄这封信。(to mail 这个动作尚未发生)
70
4. want 及 need 表示主语"想或需要"做某事，后接不定式的主动式作宾语;want, need 及 require 表示主语"需要"被作某种处置，后接动名词的主动式或接不定式的被动式均可。例如:
I want to paint the wall. 我想粉刷这堵墙。
The wall wants painting / to be painted. 这墙需要粉刷了。
作定语
1. 动名词作定语表示名词的属性或事物的用途。例如:
No one is allowed to speak aloud in the reading room. 阅览室里不准大声说话。
There is a swimming pool in our school. 我们学校有一个游泳池。 2. 不定式作定语表示将要发生的动作。例如:
That will be the only thing to do now. 那恐怕是目前唯一可行的办法。
Is that the best way to solve the problem?那是解决这个问题的最好办法吗,
Unit Nine Present Participle & Past Participle现在分词与过去分词
Tense and Voice
Present Participle
现在分词的时态和语态。现在分词有两种时态(一般时、完成时)和两种语态(主动态、被动态)的变化。主要起形容词和副词的作用。
现在分词的时态:
一般时doing
完成时having done
现在分词被动态:
一般时 being done
完成时having been done
现在分词的否定式:not doing
They came into the room laughing and talking.
他们说笑着走进房间。(一般时)
Not knowing his phone number I couldn‘t contact him.
不知道他的电话号我设法跟他联系。(否定式)
Having cleaned the room she began to work on her reading.
打扫完房间，她开始看书了。(完成时)
Having been treated nicely in the hospital, the patient was deeply moved(
在医院里被照顾得非常周到，这个病人深受感动。(完成时被动态)
Past Participle
过去分词只有一种形式,它表示一个被动或完成的动作.
形式:
规则类:V+ed 不规则类:V的分词特殊变化形式
e.g. Whenever asked about it,he could hardly hold back his emotions.每当有人问
71
及此事，他就难以控制自己的感情。
e.g. He soon felt asleep,exhausted by the journey.由于旅途劳顿, 他很快就睡着了。
e.g. We were so bored that we couldn‘t help yawning. 我们烦得要命禁不住打哈欠。
Grammatical Function
分词用作表语
The news is encouraging. 这消息令人鼓舞。
The present situation is terrifying. 目前形势令人惊恐。
Please be seated. 请坐好。
The window was broken. 窗户破了。
【注】(1) 有的用作表语的分词具有形容词性质，有的甚至已转化为形容词。
(2) 现在分词和动名词作表语的区别:现在分词作表语主要表示主语的性质和特征，而动名词作表语则主要是对主语内容的进一步说明和解释:
My job is interesting. 我的工作很有趣。
One reward of my job is meeting people. 我在工作中的一个收获是能认识许多人.
另外，动名词作表语时它可与主语交换位置，而现在分词作表语则不可与主语交换位置:
误:Interesting is my job.
正:Meeting people is one reward of my job.
还有，作表语的现在分词不能带宾语，而作表语用的动名词可以带宾语(如上例)。
分词用作定语
What disappointing news! 多么令人失望的消息!
The story had a satisfying ending. 这故事有一个令人满意的结局。
She is a trained nurse. 她是一个受过训练的护士。
All these are required subjects. 所有这些都是必修课。
【注】(1) 单个的分词作定语可以置于被修饰词语之前，但若是分词短语作定语则应置于被修饰名词之后:
There is a gentleman asking to see you. 有一位先生要求见你。
She bought a computer produced in China. 她买了一台中国生产的电脑。
(2) 由现在分词being构成的短语通常不能用作后置定语，除非这个being是构成被动结构的助动词:
误:Anyone being ill can take the medicine.(因being不是助动词，故错)
正:Anyone who is ill can take the medicine. 任何人病了都可服这药。
正:He isn‘t interested in the question being discussed. 他对讨论的问题不感兴趣。
(3) 现在分词作后置定语时，它所表示的动作通常不能发生在谓语动作之前(这也就是为什么现在分词的完成式不能用作后置定语的原因):
误:The man stealing [having stolen] the car was caught.
正:The man who stole the car was caught. 偷汽车的那个人被抓了。
72
(4) 现在分词作定语与动名词作定语的区别:现在分词作定语时，它所修饰的名词通常就是现在分词的逻辑主语，并且通常可转换成一个定语从句;而动名词作定语表示的是被修饰名词的作用、用途等。比较:
a moving truck 正在移动的汽车(moving为现在分词，与truck有主谓关系)
a moving truck 搬家汽车(moving为动名词，说明truck的用途)
a hunting dog 正在猎物的狗(hunting为现在分词，与dog有主谓关系)
a hunting dog 猎狗(hunting为动名词，说明dog的用途)
分词用作状语
分词作状语可以表示多种关系:
(1) 表时间:
Seeing the cat, the mouse ran off. 见到猫，老鼠就跑了。
The work finished, he went home. 工作做完后，他就回家了。
(2) 表原因:
Being very weak, she couldn‘t move. 她由于身体虚弱而不能行动。
His car broken down, he had to walk. 他的车坏了，所以只好走路。
Much discouraged，she moved on to London. 她很沮丧，搬到了伦敦。
(3) 表条件:
United, we stand; divided, we fall. 团结则存，分裂则亡。
Given more time, we could have done it better. 如果多给点时间，我们可以做得更好。
Working hard, you will succeed. 如果努力工作，你就可以成功。
Adding them all up, we can find the answer. 如果把它们加起来，我们就可以得到答案。
(4) 表让步:
Although living miles away, he attended the course. 虽然住在几英里以外，他仍去上课。
Defeated, he remained a popular boxer. 虽然被击败了，他仍是一个受欢迎的拳击手。
(5) 表方式:
He earns a living driving a truck. 他靠开卡车谋生。
I‘m returning you letter as requested. 我按要求给你退信。
(6) 表伴随:
He sat in the chair reading newspapers. 他坐在椅子上看报。
Don‘t you sit there doing nothing. 别什么也不干坐在那里。
He came in, followed by his wife. 他走了进来，后面跟着他的妻子。
(7) 表结果:
He fired, killing one of the passers-by. 他开枪了，打死了一个过路人。
He died, leaving his wife with five children. 他死了，留下他妻子和五个孩子。
It rained and rained, vehicles bogged and bridges washed out. 雨不停地下，车辆陷入泥沼，桥梁被水冲去。
分词用作宾补足语
He soon had them all laughing. 他很快逗得大家都笑了。
73
I saw her being taken to the operating room. 我看见她被送到手术室。
We found him greatly changed. 我们发现他变化很大。
I heard my name called. 我听到有人叫我的名字。
【注】比较以下两句用现在分词作宾补与用不带to的不定式作宾补的区别:
I saw the children playing in the street. 我看见孩子们在街上玩。
I saw the children enter a shop. 我看见孩子们进了一家商店。
一般说来，用现在分词表示动词在进行，用动词原形表示动作的全过程。除动词see外，hear, notice, feel 等动词也有类似区别
分词用作独立成分(为固定表达)
Considering his age(大致相当于 If we consider his age)，he is clever(
Allowing for the rain，he will arrive at ten(
Speaking(or Talking)of the football match， our team was rather disappointing(
Regarding(or Respecting) such matters，it is hard to say anything(
Concerning the next step，a further discussion seems necessary(
Coming to the question of marriage，I have something to say(
Judging from reports，the economic condition is now worse than last year(
Judging by the appearance，this article can?t be German-made(
Granting(or Admitting) that he was drunk， he should not have insulted my
wife(
Supposing(or Suppose) that I fall sick， nobody will take care of me(
Generally speaking， people in this town are happy(
Strictly(or Properly，Roughly) speaking，everybody is more or less selfish(
Putting this and that together， he is still happy(
Barring accidents，he should be here this evening(
Begging your pardon，your son is rather naughty(
We shall arrive before dusk， provided(or providing)(that)we walk faster(
You can inform me of this matter， seeing that you have studied it many years(
There are thirty persons，not counting the children(
There are thirty students，including ten girls(
This matter is growing serious，according to the papers(
Nothing can be done，considering(the circumstances)(
Nominative Absolute Construction分词独立主格结构(※)
独立主格结构主要用于描绘性文字中，其作用相当于一个状语从句，常用来表示时间、原因、条件、行为方式或伴随情况等。例如:
1) 表示时间
The meeting being over, all of us went home. 开完会后我们都回家了。
Her work done, she sat down for a cup of tea. 她干完了活，坐下来喝茶。
2) 表示条件
The condition being favorable, he may succeed. 若条件有利，他或许能成功。
3) 表示原因
There being no taxis, we had to walk. 没有出租车，我们只好步行。
74
He wrapped her up with great care, the night being dark and frosty. 夜又黑又冷，所以他把她裹得严严实实的。
4) 表示伴随情况
Almost all metals are good conductors, silver being the best of all. 几乎所有的金属都是良导体，而银则是最好的导体。
(=Almost all metals are good conductors, and silver is the best of all.)
常见的独立主格结构有如下几种:
1. 名词/主格代词+现在分词。名词/主格代词与现在分词之间主谓关系。如:
The girl staring at him (= As the girl stared at him), he didn‖t know what to say.
姑娘两眼望着他，他不知道说什么好。
Time permitting (= If time permits), we will go for an outing tomorrow. 如果时间允许的话，我们明天去郊游。
2. 名词/主格代词+过去分词。名词/主格代词与过去分词之间的动宾关系。如:
The problems solved (= As the problems were solved), the quality has been impr
oved. 随着问题的解决，质量已经提高了。
Her glasses broken (= Because her glasses were broken), she couldn‖t see the words on the blackboard. 由于眼镜摔坏了，她看不见黑板上的字。
3. 名词/主格代词+不定式。名词/主格代词与不定式之间是主谓关系，且强调的是一次具体性的动作。如:
is going to make a model plane, some old parts to help. 借助于一些旧零件，他He
要做一个飞机模型。
They said good-bye to each other, one to go home, the other to go to the bookstor
e. 他们道别后，一个回了家，一个去了书店。
4. 名词/主格代词+形容词。如:
An air accident happened to the plane, nobody alive. 那架飞机遭遇了空难，无一人生还。
So many people absent, the meeting had to be called off. 这么多人缺席，会议不得不取消。
5. 名词/主格代词+副词。如:
He put on his sweater wrong side out. 他把毛衣穿反了。
The meeting over, they all went home. 会议一结束，他们就都回家了。
6. 名词/主格代词+介词短语。如:
The boy goes to the classroom, book in hand. 那男孩手里拿着书去教室。
Mary was sitting near the fire, her back towards the door. 玛丽靠近火炉坐着，背对着门。
7. There being +名词(代词)如:
There being nothing else to do, we went home. 没有别的事可做，我们就回家了。
There being no further business, I declare the meeting closed. 没有再要讨论的事了，我宣布散会。
8. It being +名词(代词)如:
It being Christmas, the government offices were closed. 由于圣诞节的缘故，政府机关都休息。
It being a holiday, all the shops were shut. 由于今天是假日，所有商店都关门了。
75
Close Contact with Examination:(试题直击)
1. More and more young people are trying to do something the old.
A. served B. to serve C. serve D. serves 2. Don't forget to "Thank you!" when someone opens the door for you.
A. tell B. say C. speak D. talk 3. It's a good habit a walk after dinner.
A. to come B. to be C. to take D. to go
4. We saw a UFO on the square in my dream.
A. to drop B. land C. wear D. to fly 5. –Don't forget my parents when you are in Beijing.
–OK! I won't.
A. to see B. sees C. seeing D. see 6. The teacher asked Ben a difficult question in class.
A. answer B. answering C. to answer D. answered 7. Frank's mother told him too much sugar because it is bad for his teeth.
A. to eat B. not to eat C. eat D ate 8. –Why did you buy a radio?
– English.
A. Learn B. Learning C. To learn D. Be learning 9. A mobile phone of this type costs too much. You'd better
A. wait B. waiting C. waited D. to wait 10. –May I listen to the music here, Mr. White?
–Sorry, you'd better it like that.
A. not to do B. not do C. don't do D. not do to
11. –Do you know Neil Armstrong?
–Yes, He is the first man on the moon.
A. walk B. walks C. to walk D. walked 12. Why not your teacher for help when you can't finish it by
yourself?
A. ask; write B. to ask; writing C. ask; writing D. asking; write
13. If people cutting down the forest, they will have nowhere
A. keep; to live in B. will keep; to live in C. keep; to live D. will keep; to
live
14. –I saw Ann a green dress at the school meeting.
–I think she looks better red.
A. dressed; in B. put on; wear C. wearing; in D. wear; put on
15. She couldn't her words by the students.
A. get; understanding B. get; understood C. make; to understand D.
make; understand
16. –I can't decide .
–You mean the purple sweater or the blue one?
A. how to go there B. who to go with C. where to visit D. which to choose
17. Please don't forget the room while I am away in Beijing.
A. clean B. to clean C. cleaned D. cleaning
76
18. When we practice speaking English, we often end up in Chinese.
A. to speak B. speaking C. spoken D. speak 19. The girl was often heard happily in her room.
A. sing B. to sing C. singing D. sings 20. Doctors tell people their hands often and to stay home if they feel ill.
A. to wash B. washes C. wash D. washing 21. Peter is busy at school, but he never forgets exercise every day.
A. working; doing B. working; to do C. at work; doing 22. You'd better too much time playing computer games.
A. don't spend B. not to spend C. to not spend D. not spend 23. If I were a teacher, I would allow my students to by themselves.
A. make a living B. make decisions C. make much noise 24. –Shall we stay at home watching TV tonight?
–No, I'd like and see a movie.
A. to go B. go C. went D. going 25. –Have you seen the TV play My Ugly Mother?
–Yes, it's well worth . It' s moving that I've seen it twice.
A. seeing; too B. to see; enough C. seeing; so D. to see; such
26. –I'm very tired these days because of studying for physics.
Why not music. It can make you ___________. –
A. listen to; relaxed B. to listen to; to relax C. listening to; relax D.
listened to; relax
27. Stop a noise in the library. The students are reading books.
A. make B. to make C. makes D. making 28. –Would you mind my little sister while I am away?
–Of course not.
A. looking for B. looking at C. looking after D. looking forward to
答案:
BBCBA CBCAB CCCCB DBBBA BDBAC ADC
Unit Ten Voice and Mood语态和语气
Part one Active Voice and Passive Voice 主动语态和被动语态
语态是动词的一种形式，用以说明主语与谓语动词之间的关系。英语的语态共
有两种:主动语态和被动语态。主动语态表示主语是动作的执行者，被动语态表示
主语是动作的承受者。被动语态是动词的一种特殊形式，一般说来，只有需要动作
对象的及物动词才有被动语态。汉语往往用"被"、"受"、"给"等词来表示被动意义。
He opened the door.他打开了这扇门。(主动语态)
?The door was opened.这扇门被打开了。(被动语态)
1.Formulation of Passive Voice被动语态的公式
Object(subjective case) + be + Past Participle(V+ed) +…+by +Subject (objective case)
77
被动语态由"助动词be+及物动词的过去分词"构成。被动语态的时态变化只改变be的形式，过去分词部分不变。疑问式和否定式的变化同于一理。
Particulars:
1) 一般现在时 present simple tense: is\am\are+P.P e.g. A word spoken is an arrow let fly.(一言既出,驷马难追)
2) 一般过去时 past simple tense: was\were+P.P e.g. The glass was broken yesterday. (这块玻璃是昨天打烂的。) 3) 一般将来时 future simple tense:
a)will be+P.P
e.g. If the trees are sawed, the scenery will be destroyed.( 如果将树伐掉了，风景就会被破坏。)
b) be going to be + p.p.
e.g. These old houses are going to be knocked down.( 这些旧房子将被拆除。) 4) 现在进行时 present continuous tense:is\am\are+being(固定不变)+P.P e.g. New words are being churned out at an amazing speed.(新的词汇也以惊人的速度出炉。)
5) 过去进行时 past continuous tense:was\were+being(固定不变)+P.P e.g. Sweet music was being played on the flute.(长笛中正传出妙曲。) ) 现在完成时present perfect tense: have\has been+P.P 6
e.g. Enough has been said on this topic. (关于这个题目说得已够多的了。) 7) 过去完成时 past perfect tense: had been+P.P e.g. Neither of them knew why they had been changed into bears.(他们两人都不知道为何被变成熊。)
8) 过去将来时 past future tense:would be+P.P e.g. Of course, Mr. Knightley would be forgotten, that is, replaced by another.
(自然，南特利先生慢慢会被忘记，就是说，会为另外一个人取而代之。) e.g. The manager said the project would be completed by the end of the year. (经理说这个工程在年底前将会完成。)
Points for Attention:要点须知:
1) 要注意被动语态的不同时态
被动语态由―be+过去分词‖，其中的助动词 be 根据情况可使用各种不同时态。如:
She is respected by everyone. 她受到大家的尊重。(一般现在时)
The book will be reprinted soon. 这本书很快会重印。(一般将来时)
The road is being repaired. 路正在修整。(现在进行时)
They have been given a warning. 他们受到警告。(现在完成时)
2) 要注意带情态动词的被动语态
该结构的基本形式为―情态动词+be(或be的适当形式)+过去分词‖。这类结构非常有可能作为语境题出现在考卷中。如:
The rules must be obeyed. 这些规章
制度
关于办公室下班关闭电源制度矿山事故隐患举报和奖励制度制度下载人事管理制度doc盘点制度下载
必须遵守。
They shouldn‘t have been told about it. 这事是不应当告诉他们的。
78
3) 要注意非谓语动词的被动语态
? 不定式一般式的被动语态。由―to be+过去分词‖构成。如:
She asked to be given some work to do. 她要求给她一些工作做。
He was the last person to be asked to speak. 他是最后被邀请发言的人。 ? 不定式完成式的被动语态。由―to have been+过去分词‖构成。如:
I should like to have been told the result earlier. 我本想让人把结果早点告诉我的。
? 现在分词一般式的被动语态。由―being+过去分词‖构成。如:
I saw him being taken away. 我看见有人把他带走了。
Being protected by a wall, he felt quite safe. 有墙作保护，他感到很安全。 ? 现在分词完成式的被动语态。由―having been+过去分词‖构成。如:
Having been invited to speak, I‘ll start making preparations tomorrow. 因为邀请我去讲话，我明天就得做准备。
The subject having been opened，he had to go on with it. 话题已经开始了，他不得不谈下去。
? 动名词一般式的被动语态。由―being+过去分词‖构成。如:
She likes being looked at. 她喜欢被人瞧。
He hates being made a fool of. 他讨厌被别人愚弄。
This question is far from being settled. 这个问题远没解决。 ? 动名词完成式的被动语态。由―having been+过去分词‖构成。如:
Jenny‘s not having been trained as a dancer is her one regret. 珍妮没受过舞蹈的专业训练是她感到遗憾的事。
After having been instructed to drive out of town, I began to acquire confidence.
在接到把车开出城的指令后，我开始信心十足了。
注:过去分词没有被动式，因为它本身可以表示被动意义。如:
The door remained locked. 门仍然锁着。
4) 要注意―get+过去分词‖构成的被动语态
英语被动语态通常由―助动词be+过去分词‖构成，有时也可用―get+过去分词‖构成。如:
James got beaten last night. 詹姆斯昨晚被打了。
How did that window get opened? 那个窗户是如何打开的, 但总的说来，用get构成的被动语态不如用be构成的被动语态常见，尤其是在含有施动者的by短语时，用get构成被动语态更是少见。不过有时用be+过去分词构成被动语态构成误解时，人们可能会选get+过去分词来避免这种误解:
The window was broken. 窗户破了(表状态)。/ 窗户被打破了(表动作)
The window got broken. 窗户被打破了(表动作)
Modal Verbs and Passive Voice 含有情态动词的主动句变成被动句时，由―情态动词，be，过去分词‖构成，原来带to的情态动词变成被动语态后―to‖仍要保留。
Those remarks ought to be printed.( 那些话应该印出来.)
The camera‘s field of view can be zoomed in and out.( 摄像机的视野可以放大或者缩小。)
79
. The bus should have been retired from service years ago.(那辆公共汽车多年以前就该退役了。)
Passive Voice and ―S+Link Verb+SC(被动语态与“主系表”结构的对比) 注意:
1)―be+过去分词‖这一结构既可以是被动语态，也可以是系表结构。这两种结构主要的区别是:被动语态强调动作，系表结构强调状态。
2)从形式上来看，被动语态往往接by施动者，而系表结构往往有固定的搭配，如be joined to, be connected with, be separated from, be covered with, be interested in,
be surprised at, be satisfied with, be concerned about等。
We were surprised at the unexpected news. 听到这个意外消息，我们感到惊讶。(系表结构)
This glass is broken. 这块玻璃是破的。(系表结构，指目前的状态) 3)―by+人‖时，多用被动语态;而―by+物‖时，多属系表结构。
The house was surrounded by trees. 这房子四周都是树。(系表结构，表示静止的状态)
4)过去分词前有well, very, quite等副词修饰的是系表结构;若句中有时间、方式或目的状语时，一般为被动语态
The play is well written. 这剧本写得很好。(系表结构)
The play was written with great care. 这剧本是非常用心地写出来的。(被动语态，有方式状语)
被动语态中的过去分词必须是及物动词，而系表结构中的过去分词可以是gone, fallen, risen等不及动词。
My pen is gone. 我的钢笔不见了。(系表结构)
The sun is risen. 太阳升起来了。(系表结构)
Passive Voice Found in Active Voice (以主动语态表示被动含义) 1) 动词bear(适宜于), deserve(应受到), need(需要), require(需要), stand(忍受),
want(需要)等后接动名词时,表被动意:
The flowers want watering. (花需要浇水。)
Your shoes need cleaning.(你的鞋要擦一擦了。)
2) 不定式用于某些动词(如have, have got, get, want, need等)的宾语后作定语时，如果不定式的逻辑主语就是句子的主语，则要用主动形式表示被动意义。如:
I have a lot of work to do now. 我有很多事要做。
I want something to drink. 我想喝点什么。
注意:如果不定式的逻辑主语不是句子的主语，则应用被动式，比较:
I have something to type. 我有些东西要打(字)。(指自己打字)
I have something to be typed. 我有些东西要打(字)。(指请人打字) 3)形容词worth后接动名词时，则主动形式表示被动意义。
It might be worth thinking about.(这一点可能值得考虑。)
4)表示感觉或变化的feel, look, smell, sound, taste, turn, prove, get等系动词的主动形式表被动意。
Your explanation sounds far-fetched.(你的解释有些牵强。)
80
5)由及物动词转类而来的不及物动词catch, close, lock, open, read, sell, wash, wear,
write的主动形式表示被动意义，而且它们的状语一般是表示效果或程度的副词，如:well, easily, smoothly。
The cloth washes easily. 这种布容易洗。
The pen writes fluently. 这支笔写起来流利。
6)动词build, burn, cook, print, make，develop等的进行时，可用主动形式表示被动意义。
The house is building. 房子正在建。
The book is printing. 书正在印刷。
除不及物动词无被动语态外，在英语中，有些及物动词(尤其是那些静态动词)尽管它们可以带宾语，但却不用于被动语态，如:have，lack，fit，suit，cost，let，like等。
Part Two Mood语气
语气是一种动词形式，表示说话人对某一事物的看法或态度。一般分为三类:陈述语气，祈使语气，虚拟语气。
Subjunctive Mood虚拟语气
虚拟语气:表示动作或状态不是客观存在的事实，而是说话人的主观愿望、假设或推测等。
1. Subjunctive Mood in Simple Sentences:简单句中的虚拟语气
1)May式祝愿:
May you do even better!祝你取得更大成就～
May the world be filled with love! 让世界充满爱!
2)动词原型式:
Long live understanding!
Have a good journey!
3)其它类:
But I'd rather not answer that.(我不想回答。)
Heaven help us!(惟愿老天保佑～)
2. Subjunctive Mood in Adverbial Clause of Unreal Condition
非真实条件状语从句中的虚拟语气
81
如果条件从句谓语动词包含有were或had, should, could有时可将if省去, 但语序要倒装。
1)与现在事实相反
若与现在事实相反，虚拟语气的条件从句的谓语用过去式(be通常用were)，主句谓语用―should (would, could, might)+动词原形‖.
If you took a taxi，you'd get there quicker.
如果你坐出租车去，你可以快一点到那里。(但你不坐)
If I knew her number I could ring her up.
要是我知道她的电话号码，我就可以给她打电话了。(可惜我不知道) 2) 与过去事实相反
若与过去事实相反，虚拟语气的条件从句的谓语用过去完成时(had+过去分词)，主句谓语用―should (would, could, might)+have+过去分词‖。如:
If I'd left sooner，I'd have been on time. 要是我早点动身，我就准时到了。(但我动身太迟了)
If we had found him earlier we could have saved his life.
要是我们当时早点找到他的话，我们就可以救活他。(可惜我们找到他太晚了) 3) 与将来事实相反
若与将来事实相反，条件从句的谓语用过去式(be通常用were)，主句谓语用―should (would, could, might)+动词原形‖。如:
If he went，would you go too? 如果他去，你也去吗?(大概他不会去)
If I asked him，I'm sure he'd help us.
如果我向他提出要求，肯定他会帮助我们。(不过我不打算这样做) Omission of if:
Were I in your position, I would go.( 如果我处在你的地位，我就去。)
82
Were it not for the sun, we could not live at all. (如果没有太阳，我们根本不可能生存。)
Had he not saved me, I might have been drowned.( 要不是他救了我，我可能已经溺水而亡了。)
Should you happen to see him, please give him my regards.(如果你碰巧见到他，请代我向他致意。)
Adverbial Clause of Mixed Condition 所谓错综时间虚拟条件句即条件从句与主句所指时间不一致，如从句指过去，而主句即指的是现在或将来，此时应根据具体的语境情况，结合上面提到的三种基本类型对时态作相应的调整:
You would be much better now if you had taken my advice.
(假若你当时听我的话，你现在就会好多了。)
If it had rained last night, the ground would be wet now.
要是昨晚下过雨的话，现在地面就会是湿的。
Subjunctive Mood In Other Clauses:它类从句中的虚拟语气:
1. Objective Clause:宾语从句
1) 表示―命令‖ 、―建议‖、 ―要求‖、 ―提议，投票‖、 ―敦促，主张‖、 ―希望，打算‖、―决定‖等主观意愿的动词后的宾语从句要用虚拟，形式为:should +V, should
可留可省。
The King ordered that the man be released. (国王命令释放那人。)
The doctor advised that he change his job.( 医生劝他换工作。)
The doctor proposes that he not drink wine.(医生建议他不饮酒。)
Don't demand that he change and don't blame him if he doesn't
(切不可强求他改变，也不可在他没有改变时指责他。)
He required that they be there at two .(他要求他们两点到那里。)
The lawyer asked that the case (should) be postponed for one month .
(律师请求诉讼推迟一个月。)
The judge decide that the defendant be not guilty. (法官判决被告无罪。)
Mr. Chairman, I beg to move that the meeting be adjourned. (主席先生，我提议休会。)
She urged that he write and accept the post.(她敦促他写信接受这个职位。)
She desires that it shall not be mentioned for the present.(她希望暂且不要再提及此事了。)
Rose insisted that he be present. (罗斯坚持要他出席。)
注意:与动词insist相似，动词suggest后接宾语从句时，除可用虚拟语气外，也可用陈述语气，两者的区别也是:若谓语动词所表示的情况尚未成为事实，则用虚拟语气，此时suggest通常译为―建议‖;若谓语动词所表示的情况为既成事实，则要用陈述语气，此时的suggest通常译为―表明‖、―认为‖。比较并体会:
He suggested that we (should) stay for dinner. (他建议我们留下吃饭。)
What he said suggested that he was a cheat. (他说的话表明他是个骗子。)
I suggested that you had a secret understanding with him. (我觉得你与他心照不宣。)
83
2)Wish的虚拟:
动词wish后接宾语从句时，从句谓语要用虚拟语气。若要表示与现在事实相反的愿望，从句谓语用一般过去时或过去进行时;若表示与过去相反的愿望，从句谓语用过去完成时或者would / could+have +过去分词;若表示将来没有把握或不太可能实现的愿望，用would (could)，动词原形。如:
I wish I could be of some use. 我希望我能有什么用处。
We wish he didn‘t smoke. 我们希望他不吸烟。
I wish prices would come down. 我希望物价能降下来。
I wish the train would come. 我希望火车会来。
3)Would rather的虚拟:
? 与现在和将来事实相反时，其后所接句子用一般过去时:
I'd rather you took your time.( 我宁可你慢慢来.)
You always go without me and l‘d rather you didn‘t. (你总是不带我去，我可不愿意你这样。)
?与过去事实相反时，其后所接句子用过去完成时:
. I‘d rather you hadn‘t said it. (我真希望你没有这样说过。)
I would rather I had lost a dozen cherry trees than you should tell one lie.
( 我宁愿失掉一打樱桃树，也不愿你撒谎。)
2. Subjective Clause主语从句
It is (was)+形容词(或过去分词)+that +从句主语+(should)+V+…
常用的形容词:* natural (自然的), appropriate (适当的),advisable (合适的), preferable (更可取的), better (更好的)* necessary (必须的), important (重要的), imperative (急需的), urgent (急迫的), essential (本质的), vital (必不可少的)* probable (很可能的), possible (可能的)* desirable (极好的)advisable(合理的)，compulsory(必须的)，crucial(紧急的)，desirable(理想的)，essential(必要的)，imperative(迫切的)，incredible(惊人的)，necessary(必要的)，possible(可能的)，strange(奇怪的)，urgent(紧迫的)。
常用的过去分词(Past Participle):* required (需要的), demanded (要求), requested (被请求的), desired (要求)* suggested (建议), recommended (推荐)* ordered (命令) 示例如下:
It is important that each man pull his weight.( 各自尽力是很重要的。)
It is desired that we(should)get everything ready this evening((希望我们今晚一切都准备就绪。)
It is not necessary that everyone be a scientist. (没有必要使每一个人都成为科学家。)
It is requested that visitor not touch the painting.( 要求参观者不要手摸画幅。) It is ，某类名词，that +从句主语 +(should) +V+…
It is my ardent wish that he come at once.( 我热切地希望他立刻来。)
注:―某类名词‖指表示―建议、命令、请求、道歉、怀疑、惊奇‖等的名词 :advice ，decision ，desire ，demand ，idea，motion ，order，pity ，preference ，proposal，
84
recommendation ， requirement，resolution，shame，suggestion，surprise，wish，
wonder等。
3. Predicative Clause and Appositive Clause表语从句和同位语从句
当某些表示‖建议、请求、命令‖等主观意向的名词作主语时，其后的表语从句或
同位语从句需用虚拟语气，其表达形式为should ，动词原形或直接用动词原形。这
类名词常见的有:
demand (要求), desire (请求),requirement (要求) advice (劝告),
recommendation (建议),suggestion (建议)
order (命令)
necessity (必要地), preference (优先)
proposal (计划), plan (计划), idea (办法)，
recommendation以及plan，idea，resolution等。
His suggestion is that an agreement be made between the two parties.
(他的建议是双方要达成个
协议
离婚协议模板下载合伙人协议 下载渠道分销协议免费下载敬业协议下载授课协议下载
。)
The suggestion that the mayor present the prizes was accepted by everyone(
(由市长颁发奖金的建议得到了大家的赞同。)
4.定语从句中的虚拟:It is(high/about) time that +从句主语+ 谓语动词一般过去
式:
I think it‘s time they were taught a lesson. (我想现在该给他们一点教训了。)
It‘s high time we left. 我们早该动身了。
It‘s about time that we put an end to this controversy.
现在该是我们停止这场争论的时候了。
从句谓语通常用过去式表示现在或将来，有时也用过去进行时或―should+动词原形‖
较少见，且should不能省略，其意为―(早)该干某事了‖:
It is(high) time that +从句主语+should+动词原形+其它
It is high time that we should begin to work. 我们可真该开始工作了。
Close Contact with Examination:(试题直击)
1. Newspapers are made __ paper. Paper is made __ wood. A. from/of B. of/from C. of/in D. in/from 2. A lot of new roads ___ built in the west of China.
A. must B. must be C. has D. have 3. This dictionary mustn‘t ____ from the library.
A. take away B. taken away C. are taken away D. be taken away
4. My shoes ____ . I went out for a new pair.
A. is worn out B. wore out C. were worn off D. were worn out
5. His car ___ tomorrow.
A. will be repaired B. is repaired C. is being repaired D. has been repaired
6. When your homework ____ , we will go to play football.
A. is done B. are done C. had done D. will be done
85
7. He asked me _______.
A. what the paper is used B. what the paper was used for
C. what was the paper made of D. what‘s the paper used as
8. Three fourths of the information on the internet ___ in English.
A. am B. is C. are D. be
9.English is widely used. Many business letters around the world ___ in it.
A. are written B. were written C. are writing D. were writing 10.This pair of scissors ___ in China.
A. Make B. made C. is made D. are made
11.Three quarters of the messages _____ by telegraph.
Was sent B. were sent C. Sent D. send
12. In the past 10 years, China ____ up many man-made satellites.
A. has been sent B. has sent C. was sent D. sent 13.They ___ to help the farmers with the harvest last autumn.
asked B. asking C. to ask D. were asked
14.We are always kept ____.
A. to smoking B. on smoking C. from smoking D. off smoking 15.Nothing can stop us ___ English.
A. learn B. learning C. learned D. learns
16. Mary ___ some songs in her room in the morning.
A. heard sing B. heard to sing C. was heard sing D. is heard to sing 17. Mary ___ an English song in her room last night.
A. was heard to sing B. is heard to sing C. was heard singing D. is heard
singing
18. The guide said that the dinosaur eggs ____ about 95 million years ago.
A. lay B. were lay C. laid D. were laid
19. We found the ground ____ snow.
A. cover with B. is covered with C. was covered with D. was covering with 20. The shop assistant showed a hat _____ red silk to us.
A. made from B. made of C. was made of D. was made from 参考答案:
1-5 BBDDA 10 ABBAC 11-15 BBDCB 16-20 DCDCB
Unit Eleven Sentences and Patterns句子与句型
(Brief Introduction简介)
1. Types of Sentences句子种类
1) Declarative Sentence: a sentence that simply makes a statement. A declarative sentence simply states a fact or argument, without requiring either an answer or action from the reader. It is perhaps the most common type of sentence there is. 陈述句:说明一个事实或陈述一种看法。
Light travels faster than sound. 光比声速度快。(说明事实)
The film is rather boring. 这部电影很乏味。(说明看法)
86
2) Interrogative Sentences:a sentence that asks a question，which，in general, can be
classified into four functional categories.
疑问句:提出问题,分为功能不同的四类:
? General Questions:
Can you finish the work in time? 你能按时完成工作吗,
Did you receive my message?你收到我的信息了吗,
? WH Questions:
Where do you live? 你住那儿,
How do you know that? 你怎么知道那件事,
? Alternative Questions:
Do you want tea or coffee ? 你是要茶，还是要咖啡,
Shall we leave at six or seven,我们在6点，还是在7点钟动身, ? Tag-Questions:
He doesn't know her, does he? 他不认识她，对不对,
There's a big match tonight, isn't there? 今晚有场大赛，是吗, 3) Imperative Sentences: sentences to give orders, requests and suggestions.
祈使句:发出命令，提出要求或建议。
Come this way, please. 请这边走。
Don't be nervous! 别紧张～
4) Exclamatory Sentences: sentences expressing surprise or strong feeling
感叹句通常有what, how引导，表示赞美、惊叹、喜悦、等感情。what修饰名词，how 修饰形容词，副词或动词，感叹句结构主要有以下几种: a) What-Patterns:
,What，a,an，形容词(，名词单数(，主语，谓语～
What a good time they are having～他们玩得多快活啊～
,What，形容词，可数名词复数形式，主语，谓语～
What beautiful flowers these are～ 这些是多么美丽的花啊～
,What，形容词，不可数名词，主语，谓语～
What fine weather it is today～今天的天气多好啊～ b) How-Patterns:
,How，形容词，主语，谓语～
How beautiful the rainbow is! 多美丽的彩虹呀!
,How，副词，主语，谓语～
How hard he works! 他工作多努力～
,How，主语，谓语～
How time flies! 光阴似箭～
5) Interchangeability of Two Patterns
两种感叹句的互换:
一个由what引导的感叹句可以改写为由how引导的感叹句，且意义不变。
What a beautiful school ours is! ? How beautiful our school is!
2. Points for Attention in Tag Questions:反义疑问句中须注意的要点: 1) She often has lunch at school, doesn‘t she?
2) You don‘t like sports, do you?
87
3) You can‘t do it, can you?
4) They are very late for the meeting, aren‘t they?
5) He has supper at home every day, doesn‘t he? (不能用hasn‘t he?) 6) They have known the matter, haven‘t they? (不能用don‘t they?) 7) They will go to town soon, won‘t they?(不能用don‘t they?或 aren‘t they?) 8) He works very hard, doesn‘t he?(不能用didn‘t he?或won‘t he?) 9) Your father is unhappy, isn‘t he?(不能用is he?) 10) The man is dishonest, isn‘t he? (不能用is he?)
11) It is impossible to learn English without remembering more words, isn‘t it?(不能
用is it ?)
12) She never tells a lie, does she?(不用doesn‘t she?)
13) He was seldom late, was he?(不用wasn‘t he?)
14) I am a very honest man, aren‘t I?
15) I think that he has done his best, hasn‘t he?
16) We think that English is very useful, isn‘t it? (不用don‘t we?) 17) I don‘t think that you can do it, can you? (不用do I?) 18) We don‘t believe that the news is true, is it? (不用do we?) 19) They all think that English is very important, don‘t they? (不用isn‘t it?) 20) He didn‘t think that the news was true, did he? (不用wasn‘t/ was it?) 21) They said that you had finished your work, didn‘t they? (不用hadn‘t you) 22) Kate told you that she would go there, didn‘t she? (不用wouldn‘t she?) 23) Something is wrong with the computer, isn‘t it?
24) Nothing has happened to them, has it? 25) Someone has taken the seat, hasn‘t he?
26) Everyone has done their best in the game, haven‘t they?
27) Let me have a try, shall I?(will you?) 28) Let us stop to rest, will you? 29) Let‘s go home together, shall we?
30) Do sit down, won‘t you?/ will you?
31) You feed the bird today, will you? 32) Please open the window, will you?(won‘t you?)
33) Don‘t make any noise, will you?
34) There are two cakes on the plate, aren‘t there?
35) Here is a story about Mark Twain, isn‘t here?
36) You‘d better tell him about the matter, hadn‘t you?
37) We had better do it by ourselves, hadn‘t we?
38) He used to live in the country, didn‘t he?/usedn‘t he?
39) They used to be good friends, didn‘t they?/usedn‘t they? 40) He might have forgotten his pen in the classroom yesterday, didn‘t he? (不用
mightn‘t he?/ hasn‘t he?)
41) You must have got up late this morning, didn‘t you?
(不用mustn‘t you?/haven‘t you?)
42) Everyone must have known the death of the waitress, haven‘t they? (不用
mustn‘t they?)
88
43) You must have worked there a year ago, didn‘t you?
(不用mustn‘t you?/ haven‘t you?)
44) What he said is true, isn't it? (不用didn‘t he?)
45) Where we will build the dam has not been decided yet, has it? (不用won‘t we?)
46) To do one good deed is easy for a person, isn't it? 47) Skating is your favorite sport, isn't it?
细节补充:
宾语从句的反义疑问句
注意宾语从句的反意疑问句的对应规则:
一、若反意疑问句的陈述部分为I (we) think(believe，suppose，consider)，that 从句时，问句部分的助动词和主语与that从句内的动词和主语保持一致。
eg.1.I think that he has done his best, hasn't he? 2.We think that English is very useful, isn't it? 二、若反意疑问句的陈述部分为I (we)don't
think(believe，suppose，consider)，that从句时，从句为否定意义，问句部分的
助动词和主语仍与that从句保持一致，用肯定形式。
eg.1.I don't think that you can do it, can you? 2.We don't believe that the news is true, is it? 三、反意疑问句的陈述部分为非第一人称主语，think (believe，suppose，
consider)+that
从句时，问句部分的助动词和主语与陈述部分的助动词和主语保持一致。
eg.1.They all think that English is very useful, don't they?
2.He didn't think that the news is true, did he? We think that we will win the game,won't we? .陈述部分为宾语从句时
? A 主句主语为第一人称时,并且谓语动词是believe 、think 、suppose 、imagine 、expect等——附加疑问部分的主语和谓语与从句保持一致(此时,还要注意否定转
移)
B 主句主语为第一人称时,并且谓语动词是除了believe 、think 、suppose 、imagine 、expect等以外的词,附加疑问部分的主语和谓语与主句保持一致
? 主句主语是其他人称时——附加疑问部分的主语和谓语与主句保持一致
?I suppose father is sleeping ，isn‘t he ,
?I don‘t think you are right ，are you ,
?We told him we would go there next week ,didn't we ? ?He said that he would come back next Monday ，didn‘t he ,
?They don‘t think that she will win ，do they ,
Unit Twelve Simple Sentences and Complex Sentences(简单句和复合句)
89
1.Three Types of Sentences句子的三类别:
1)Simple Sentences: sentences having no coordinate or subordinate clauses.
英语中，只含有一个主谓结构并且句子各成分都只由单词或短语构成的独立句子或分句叫做简单句。在简单句中主语和谓语是句子的主干，是句子的核心。
She is very fond of ballet.( 她很喜欢芭蕾。)
He isn't the man to shy at difficulties.( 他不是在困难面前畏缩的人。)
2) Compound Sentences: A sentence of two or more coordinate independent clauses,
often joined by a conjunction or conjunctions.由并列连词连接的两个或两个以上独立分句的句子就是并列句。
The food was good, but he had little appetite.( 食物很精美，但他却没什么胃口。) 并列句是由并列连词and，but，or，for，so等把两个或两个以上主谓结构的简单句连在一起而构成的句子。其结构为:简单句+并列连词+简单句。
Classification of Compound Sentences:并列句的类型:
Coordination Correlation:表示同等关系的并列句 :
这类并列句常用并列连词and连接前后简单句，and常译为―和‖、―并且‖，也可不译出来。如:
He likes playing football and he plays well.(他喜欢踢足球，并且踢得很好。)
Last year l met Kate and we became friends.(去年我和凯特相遇，我们成了朋友。)
Adversative Relation:表示转折关系的并列句:
这类并列句常用并列连词but(但是)，yet(可是)，while(而，另一方面)，however(可是)等连接前后简单句，but常译为―但是‖，―可是‖，切不可与从属连词though或although一起使用。例如:
It has no mouth, but it can talk. (它没有嘴巴，但是它会说话。)
School is over, yet all the teachers are still working.(学校放学了，可是老师们仍然在工作。)
He wants to be a writer, while I want to be a scientist. (他想当作家，而我则想当科学家。)
It's raining hard, however, we must go out. (雨下得很大，然而我们必须出去。 )
3) Complex Sentences复合句
A sentence that contains one main clause or independent clause and at least one
subordinate clause or dependent clause 包含一个主句和一个或几个从句的句子叫复合句，从句由从属连词引导。
The film had begun when we got to the cinema. (我们到达电影院的时候，电影已经开演了。)
People used to believe that the world was flat.(人们从前认为地球是扁平的。)
如果一个句子充当另一个句子的组成部分， 如主语、 宾语、 表语、同位语、定语、状语等，具有这样结构的句子称为主从复合句。充当某一成分的句子称为从句，带着从句的句子称为主句。从句对主句的关系是从属关系。主句和从句之间有一定的
90
连接词加以连接。从属关系的复合句包括名词性从句(Nominal Clauses)(包括主语从句、表语从句、宾语从句、同位语从句)、定语从句(Relative Clauses)、状语从句(Adverbial Clauses)。
Nominal Clauses:
1. Subjective Clause:
It作形式主语类:
大部分主语从句都可以用it作形式主语，这主要是为了保持句子平衡，主语从句常用it作形式主语，将主语从句后置。用it作形式主语的主语从句结构有如下几种: 1) It is + 名词 + that从句 It's a pity that we can't go. 很遗憾我们不能去。 2) It is + 形容词 + that从句
It is certain that she will do well in her exam.毫无疑问她考试成绩会很好。 3) It + 动词 + that从句
It seems that Alice is not coming to the party at all.艾丽丝似乎不来参加晚会。 4) It is + 过去分词 + that从句
It is said that Mr. Green has arrived in Beijing. 据说格林先生已经到了北京。 注意: 用形式主语it引导的主语从句相当多，有些已形成固定的语法和译法。常见的有:
It is said that... 据说……It is reported that... 据报导……It is well known that... 众所周知……
It is believed that... 人们相信……It is thought that... 人们认为…… 其它类:
When we should start is still a question. (我们该什么时候开始还是个问题呢)
Whether you go or stay is all the same to me.( 不论你是去还是留，对我皆无所谓。)
2. Objective Clause: 宾语从句即从句在复合句中作主句的宾语，它属于名词性从句。它可以作主句谓语动词的宾语，也可以作介词的宾语。宾语从句以从句的句式来决定连接词，常见连接词有三类:从属连词 that ，if ，whether，连接代词 who， whom， whose， which， what连接副词 when ，where ，how ，why。
Points for Attention:
1) 语序: 从句的词序用陈述语序(主+ 谓)
2) 时态:主句的谓语动词如果是过去时，从句的时态应以过去时为基础作相应的变化;如果从句的动作发生在主句之前，则从句要用过去完成时态; 如果主句的谓语动词是一般现在时，则从句可以是任何时态。
3) 使用宾语从句还有一个要注意的问题是在think, believe, suppose, expect等动词所跟的宾语中，如果从句谓语是否定的，一般要将否定词移到主句谓语上，而将从句的谓语变为肯定形式。
I don't think he has time to play football with you.(我想他没有时间和你踢足球。)
I told him that we could talk specifics.(我对他说我们可以讨论具体问题。)
She said that she had seen him the night before.( 她说她在前一天晚上看见他了。) 4) 如果宾语从句说的是客观真理、自然现象或事实时，这时宾语从句要用一般现在时态。
91
The teacher said that light travels much faster than sound.( 老师说，光的速度比声音快得多。)
5) 由连词if、 whether 引导的表示―是否…‖的宾语从句。Whether,if 在从句中不做句子的成分，一般情况下，whether和if 可以替换。
I don‘t know if/whether he will come tomorrow. (我不知道他明天是否会来。) Points for Attention:
? 介词后面的宾语从句中不用if引导:
It depends on whether the letter arrives in time.( 这取决於信是否来得及时.) ? 和不定式连用作宾语时不用if引导.
Whether to accept the offer was a teaser.( 是否接受那项提议还是个难题。)
3. Predicative clause表语从句
1) that引导的表语从句
其结构为:主语 + 连系动词 + that-从句。
The fact is that he didn‘t even take the exam (事实是他甚至都没有参加考试)
His chief worry was that he lacked experience.(他主要担心的是他缺乏经验。) 2) as if，as though，because，just as等引导的表语从句
It looks as if we will be late.(看来我们似乎要迟到了)
3) wh-疑问词引导的表语从句
is what we are most badly in need of .( 这是我们最需要的东西。) This
That is why a wise man always thinks twice before saying anything.
(这就是为什么智者一定会深思之后才开口。)
What I want to know is who came first in the contest.
(我想知道的是比赛谁得第一名。)
?主句的主语是reason时，表语从句要用that，不能用because。
The reason why she called me is that she will not attend the party(
The reason why he was dismissed was that he was careless and irresponsible( ?引导表语从句时可以用whether，不能用 if。
His first question was whether Tom had arrived yet(
4. Appositive clause同位语从句
1) that引导
I'm afraid they'll just have to face the fact that they've failed.
( 我恐怕他们真得该正视已经失败的事实。)
The news that he intended to come gave us much pleasure.
(他打算来的消息使我们很高兴。)
The belief that numbers have special powers is an extremely old one.
(认为数字具有特殊的能量是一种相当古老的信仰。)
2)wh-疑问词引导的同位语从句
这类引导词有三类:
疑问代词who，which，what
疑问副词where，when，why，how
从属连词:
I have no idea what time it is .(我不知道现在是什么时候。)
92
Again the question arises how we put into practice the things we have learned.
(怎样学以致用的问题又再次出现了。)
He hasn‘t made the decision whether he will go there.
(他还没有做出决定是否去那里.)
Football is much too tough a sport and I have small doubt whether it is really suitable for girls.
(足球是种剧烈的运动，我有点怀疑它是否真适合于女孩子。)
Adverbial Clauses
从句用作状语称为状语从句。根据用途，状语从句可分为时间、地点、原因、条
件、方式、让步、结果、目的、比较等状语从句。
1. Adverbial clause of time
时间状语从句表示时间，常用的关联词有when, until, as, after, before, since, as soon as, whenever等等。特殊引导词:the minute, the moment, the second, every time, the day，the instant, immediately , directly, no sooner … than, hardly …when, scarcely … when
Be sure to put out the light before you go to ged.(睡前务必熄灯。)
He falls asleep as soon as his head hits the pillow.( 他头一沾枕头就睡着了。)
I had no sooner got back to the kitchen than the door-bell rang loud enough to wake the dead.
( 我刚走回厨房,门铃又响了,响得足以把死人吵醒。)
The moment Elizabeth opened the front door to greet him, the words flew out of his head.
(就在伊丽莎白打开前门迎接他的一瞬间，他准备好的话都消失了。)
2. Adverbial Clause of Cause
常用引导词:because, since, as, for
特殊引导词:seeing that, now that, in that, considering that, given that.
Now that everybody has come, let‘s begin our conference.
I decided to stop and have lunch, for I was feeling quite hungry.
Since you make the bed, you must lie on it.(自己铺床自己睡，自作自受。)
Given that they?re inexperienced, they?ve done a good job.
(考虑到他们经验不足的事实，他们已经算是做得不错了。)
3. Adverbial Clause of Condition
条件状语从句表示真实的或现实的条件，引导从句所用的关联词有:
常用引导词:if, unless,
特殊引导词:as/so long as, only if, providing/provided that, supposing that, in case that, on condition that
If you are happy and you know it ，clap your hands.
(如果感到快乐你就拍拍手。)
Don‘t forget to lock the door if you are the last one to lea ve the room.
(最后一个离开房子的人，请你别忘了锁上房门。)
I can tell you the truth on condition that you promise to keep a secret.
93
(我可以告诉你真相,条件是你答应保守秘密。)
The game has little meaning unless you do your utmost to win. (如果你不全力以赴去赢得胜利，那比赛就没有什么意义了。)
4. Adverbial Clause of Concession
让步状语从句表示―虽然、尽管、即使‖等概念，使句子具有对比的因素。 常用引导词:though, although, even if, even though 特殊引导词: as(用在让步状语从句中必须要倒装)，while ( 一般用在句首 )，no matter …， in spite of the fact that, while, whatever, whoever, wherever, whenever,
however, whichever
In spite of the fact that doctors have even warned that it causes cancer, people still
keep on smoking. (尽管医生甚至已经警告说抽烟会致癌，但人们还是照抽不误。)
One cannot but admire her even if one may not like her.(即使你不喜欢她也只得佩服她。)
He will come on time even though it rains(即使下雨,他也还是会准时来的。)
Though they may not succeed, they will still try.
(即使可能不会成功， 但他们仍努力尝试。)
?though 引导的让步状语从句的用法比较特殊， 它可以倒装， 也可以不倒装， 具体用法参见as引导让步状语从句的用法。
表示―虽然、 即使、 尽管‖， as引导的让步状语从句必须采用倒装结构。as / though?
引导让步从句时必须将表语或状语提前 (即形容词, 副词, 分词, 实义动词提前)。 注意:
1) 句首名词不能带任何冠词。
2) 句首是实义动词, 其他助动词放在主语后。如果实义动词有宾语和状语, 随实义动词一起放在主语之前。
Happy as / though the bride is, she will feel homesick at the beginning.
(新娘尽管快乐，但起初会想家。)
Boy as he is, he was chosen king.(尽管他还是个孩子，但却被立为国王了。)
Hard as /though they tried, they couldn‘t make her change her mind.
(尽管他们做了很大努力，却没法让她改变主意。)
If that is so, try as you might, you can't keep the lost time.
(那样的话，不管你怎么努力，失去的时间都无法赶上。)
5. Adverbial Clause of Result
结果状语从句表示结果， 常由连词so…that, such(a/an)…that, so that引导。 常用句型为:
so，形容词(或副词)，that
so，形容词，a(或an)，单数可数名词，that
such，a(或an)(，形容词)，单数可数名词，that
such(，形容词)，复数可数名词，that
such(，形容词)，不可数名词，that
such，that
示例如下:
It is raining，so that I cannot go out((天在下雨，我出不去了。)
94
I've had so many falls that I'm black and blue all over. (我跌了那么多跤，摔得浑身青一块紫一块。)
It was such a boring speech that I fell asleep quite soon.
(这讲演枯燥无味, 听了没多久我就睡着了.)
His kindness was such that we will never forget him.(他待人那么厚道，我们永远
不会忘记他。)
6. Adverbial Clause of Purpose
目的状语从句表示目的，常用关联词so that, in order that等引导。目的状语从句中
的谓语动词常由―情态动词+动词原形‖构成。
Her parents pinched and scraped so that she could study singing abroad.
(她父母省吃俭用好让她出国学习声乐.)
I‘ll show you so you can see how it‘s done.(我做给你看，以便你知道怎样干。)
注意:该句中so 后面的that被省略了。
We eat so that we may live; but some people seem to live in order that they may
eat.
(人吃饭是为了延续生命;但有一些人活着似乎就是为了吃饭。)
Please speak more slowly so that we can make full notes. (请讲慢一点，以便我们
能作详细笔记。)
7. Adverbial Clause of Comparison
比较状语从句表示两项或多项的同级或差异比较，常用的关联词有 than, as…as, not
so…as, the more…the more.
The ground is as hard as stone after the drought. (长期干旱之后，土地硬得就像石头一样.)
It is larger than Africa, larger than either of the two Americas, and four times as
large as Europe.( 它比非洲大，比北美洲大，也比南美洲大，它有四个欧洲那样
大。)
Indeed Europe is so much smaller than Asia that some geographers regard
Europe as a peninsula of Asia.( 与亚洲相比，欧洲确实太小，有些地球学家把欧
洲看做亚洲的一个半岛。)
And the more we learn, the better we realize our ignorance.
( 而我们学得越多，就越感到自己无知。)
The lion is not so fierce as he is painted.( 传闻往往失实。)
She finds that the more products she uses, the worse her skin looks and the more
she will have to depend on those skincare products.( 她发现护肤品使用的越多，皮
肤就越差，继而也就越依赖于那类护肤产品。)
8. Adverbial Clause of Manner
方式状语从句表示动作的方式，回答以何种方式的问题，常用关联词as, as if, as
though。
I have changed it as you suggest. (我已照你的建议作了改动。)
That knock sounded to me as if someone was up to mischief. (这种敲门在我听来似乎有点来意不善。)
95
The stuffed dog barks as if it is / were a real one. (这玩具狗叫起来像是真狗似的。)
The Attributive Clause
定语从句(Attributive Clauses)在句中做定语，修饰一个名词或代词，被修饰的名词,词组或代词即先行词。定语从句通常出现在先行词之后，由关系词(关系代词或关系副词)引出。 关系代词有:who, whom, whose, that, which等。关系副词有:when, where, why等。
1(关系代词引导的定语从句
关系代词所代替的先行词是人或物的名词或代词，并在句中充当主语、宾语、定语、表语等成分。
1) 先行词指人，关系代词用who, whom, that，这些词代替的先行词是人的名词或
代词, 如:
He is not a man who wears his heart on his sleeve.( 他不是一个感情外露的人。)
She has had two sons, of whom the younger is outgoing. (她有两个儿子，小儿子性格外向。)
2)先行词指物， 关系代词用which, that，它们所代替的先行词是事物的名词或代词，在从句中可作主语、宾语等，如:
The package (which / that) you are carrying is about to come unwrapped. 你拿的包快散了。
They rushed over to help the man whose car had broken down.(那人车坏了，大家都跑过去帮忙。)
3) 只能用that作为定语从句的关系代词的情况:
? 先行词为序数词、数词、形容词最高级时，只用that。例如:
He is the last man (that) I want to see now.(他是我现在最不愿见到的人。) ? 先行词既有人，又有物时,只用that。例如:
Can you remember the scientist and his theory that we have learned? ? 在there be句型中，通常情况下用that，不用which。例如:
There are all kinds of things that have to be seen about.(有各种各样的事情需要考虑。)
? 当先行词是anything, everything, nothing (something 即可含在内，亦可除外), few, all, none, little, some等代词时，或者是由every, any, all, some, no, little, few,
much，each等修饰时:
Everything that happens has a cause and an effect.(一切事情的发生均有其因果。)
2.关系副词引导的定语从句:
I want to return to a time when life was simple.( 我想重新找回简简单单的生活)
This is a place where we pursue truth and enrich our understanding.
( 这是一个追求真理、丰富知识的园地。)
That is the reason why I am not in favor of it .( 这就是我不赞成它的原因。)
All my life I remained happy until the day that I died.
(我这一辈子都很快乐，一直到我过世的那一天。)
3. 介词+关系词:
1)介词+whom只能指人;介词+ which只能指物:
96
He is eloquent enough for whom truth speaks。(有理走遍天下。)
There was a board on which it reads: "Iron ponies on hire, 25 dollars an hour."
(有一块招牌上面写着:―摩托车出租，每小时25美元。‖)
He handed me a pen, with which I wrote down my address for him. (他递给我一支钢笔，我就用那支笔给他写下了我的地址。)
2)其它类:
Please tell me the reason why (=for which) you were absent.(请告诉我你为什么缺
席。)
He died after three weeks' illness, during which Mrs. Penniman, as well as his
daughter, had been assiduous at his bedside.
(三个星期之后，不管女儿与潘尼曼太太在病榻旁如何苦心护理，他竟闭目长逝
了。)
He has three children, one of whose children is studying abroad now.
(他有三个小孩，其中一个在国外读书。)
Points for Attention:
关系副词引导的定语从句先行词是指时间、地点或理由的名词，引导词可用关系副
词并在从句中作状语。
1)when, where, why 是关系副词，它们的含义相当于"介词+ which"结构，因此常
常和"介词+ which"结构交替使用. 例如:
This city is the place where (in which) I was born这个城市是我的出生地。
2)怎样判断关系代词与关系副词
方法一:用关系代词，还是关系副词完全取决于从句中的谓语动词。及物动词后面
跟宾语，就必须要求用关系代词;而不及物动词后不跟宾语，则要求用关系副词。
例如:
This is the mountain village where I stayed last year.
I'll never forget the days when I worked together with you. 习惯上总把表地点或时间的名词与关系副词 where, when联系在一起。
方法二:准确判断先行词在定语从句中的成分(主、谓、宾、定、状)，也能正确选择
出关系代词/关系副词。
Bottleneck and Breaking-through:
1)Is this museum ___ you visited a few days age?
A. where B. that C. on which D. the one
2)Is this the museum ____ the exhibition was held,
A. where B. that C. on which D. the one 例1变为肯定句:This museum is ___ you visited a few days ago. 例2变为肯定句:This is the museum ___ the exhibition was held. 在句1中，所缺部分为表语(也是先行词)，而where, that, on which都不能起到先
行词的作用，只有the one既做了主句的表语，又可做从句的宾语，而关系代词在宾
语从句中作宾语，我们就可以省略关系代词，所以应选D。
而句2中, 主、谓、宾俱全，从句部分为句子的状语表地点，既可用副词where，又
因 in the museum词组，可用介词in + which 引导地点状语。而此题中，介词on 用
的不对，所以选A。
97
Close Contact with Examination(试题直击):
1(Linda tried to become an excellent teacher，________at last she succeeded(
A(so B(or C(but D(and
2(Help others whenever you can________you'll make the world a nicer place to live(
A(and B(or C(unless D(but
3(–What do you like doing after class?
–I like not only reading________painting(
A(and B(but also C(or D(for
4(_____Tom_____Mary speaks good Chinese，So they can communicate with these
Chinese students very well(
A(Neither;nor B(Not only;but also C(Both;and D(Either;or 5(–I hear_____your grandpa_____your grandma like watching Min Opera(
–Right，just as many old people do in Fuzhou(
A(both;and B(either;or C(neither;nor D(not only;but also 6(Keep an English diary,__your English will improve.
A. or B(since C(when D(and
7(Money is important________it's not the most important thing(
A(and B(but C(or D(so
8(–What a nice T-shirt!Can I have it，Mom?
–Well，it really looks nice，_________I think it's too expensive(
A(but B(as C(for D(or
9(–Would you like to go to the concert with us tonight?
–I'd love to，__________I can't(I have a lot of homework to do.
A(or B(but C(so D(and
10(–Can you help me with my business?
–I‘d like to( I have a meeting to attend;
A(because B(as C(but D(and
11(The little boy is very young_______he can look after himself well(
A(so B(or C(but D. than
12(–Don't play with the knife，_____ you'll cut your hand(
–Sorry，I________(
A(so;can't B(and;can't C. but;mustn't D.or;won't 13. I can __________ swim ________skate(Will you teach me how to swim and skate?
A(not only;but also B(both;and C(either;or D(neither;nor 14.Mom,my classmates are waiting outside,________ I must go now.
A.or B.but C.so D.though
15(Could you tell me_________?
A(what are you looking for B(what you are looking for
C(what were you looking for D(what you were looking for 16.–Do you know ______the MP4 yesterday?
–Sorry, I've no idea about it(
A(how much did he pay for B(how much he paid for
C(he paid for how much D(he paid how much for 17(The reporter will tell us_________he saw and heard in Japan(
98
A(what B(that C(why D(which
18(The new-designed car is on show now(I wonder __________(
A(how much it cost B(how much did it cost
C(how much it costs D(how much does it cost 19(–Sorry，what did you say just now?
–I asked________(
A(when did he leave B(where have you been
C(whom will you go with D(how I could get to the station 20(Excuse me，sir(Could you tell me_________?
A(where is the bank nearest B(where is the nearest bank C(where the nearest bank is D(the nearest bank is where‘
21(This year the villagers have produced________ rice they did two years ago(
A(1ess;than B(as less;as C(fewer;than D(as few;as 22(We don‘t have much homework now and our school bags are they used to be(
A(as heavy as B(not as heavy as C(as heavily as D(not as heavily as
23(________John failed to climb to the top of the mountain several times，he didn‘t give up(
A(Although B(Because C(Whether D(Unless
24. _________you work，_________result you'll get(
A(The hard;the better B(The harder:the better C(The harder;the best 25. It's quite common in Britain to say―Thank you‖ to the drivers_________people
get off the bus(
A(after B(Since C(until D(when
26(The little boy is_____young________he can't go to sch001(
A(enough;to B(too;to C(so:that D(such;that
27(–Did you call Sara back?
–I didn't need to， we'll have a meeting together tonight(
A(though B(unless C(because D(if
28(Hamburgers are junk food，many children like them(
A(If B(Unless C(Because D(Although
29(Now many parents send their children to foreign countries，_________they want them to get a better education(
A(until B(though C(because D. so
30(You'd better look up the new word in a dictionary________you don't know it(
A(if B(that C(though D(whether
31(The art club is for members only(You can't go in you are a member(
A(unless B.because C(if D(though
32. –Tim，do you think time is money?
–Yes，but I think it is________money(
A(more important than B(very important as C(the same as D(not important as
33.–Where was your brother at this time last night?
–He was writing an e-mail_________I was watching TV at home.
99
A(as soon as B(after C(until D(while 34.–Hurry up(The bus is coming(
–Wait a moment(Don‘t cross the street_______ the traffic lights are green(
A(after B(until C(while D(since
35. –What should I do here?
–Just put all the things _________ they were.
A.where B.when C.whose D.which
36. The gentlemen ____are coming to my office tomorrow are my classmates many
years ago.
A. whom B. who C. those D. which
37. I hate people____talk much but do little.
A. whom B. whose C. which D. who
38. The girl____I just talked with is Ben's sister.
A.whom B.which C. as D. whose
39. –What are you looking for?
–I'm looking for the pen _________ I bought yesterday.
A.who B.which C.whose D. when
40.The whole world is fighting against the H1N1,a disease __________ has caused
many deaths.
A.who B.which C.whom D.what
[参考答案]
1-5 DABBA 6-10 DBABC 11-15 CDDCB 16-20 BACDC
21-25 ABABD 26-30 CCDCA 31-35 AADBA 36-40 BDABB
Unit Thirteen: Collateral Series它类句型(存在句There-be与倒装句)
Part One : Existential Sentence(存在句)
1. Formulation公式:
There be，Noun(名词) / Pronoun代词(Phrase)，Place/Time(地点或时间)
There be句型的基本用法是表示―某地(或某时)存在有某人(或某物)，而并非某地(某人、某物或某时)拥有什么东西‖，其形式为―There be，代词或名词(短语)，地点/时间状语‖。 该句像是一种倒装句，但又非倒装句，因为这种―倒装‖已成为一种自然的词序。这种结构中的there本身无词义，其后的动词be具有―存在‖之意，所以是一实义动词。be要与主语保持人称和数的一致。否定句是在be后加not;一般疑问句是将be放在句首;反意疑问句中的简短问句是由―be(或其否定式)，there‖构成。试看以下各例:
There is a garden behind the house. 房子后面有一座花园。
There is nothing but clothing in this cupboard. 这个柜子里只有衣服。
There is a telephone box on the corner. 在拐弯处有一个电话间。
If there is any problem, let me know. 如果有什么问题可以通知我。
There is only one person I could approach. 只有一个人我可以去找。
There is little difference between the two words. 这两个字没有什么差别。
There was a dog there. 那里有一条狗。
100
There is a bus-stop just there. 那里就有公共汽车站。
注意:句中第一个there是引词，无词义;第二个there是副词，有词义。
2. Differences Between There Be and Have/Has(There be与have和has的对比) There be结构表―存在‖，have表―所有‖，试比较:
There are several oak trees in the garden. 花园里有好几株橡树。(主语是oak trees)
They have several oak trees in the garden. 他们在花园里种有好几株橡树。(主语是they)
There‘s a telephone in every room. 每一个房间都有一部电话。(强调客观存在)
Every room has a telephone. 每一个房间有电话。(强调电话是每个房间的一固有部分)
在通常情况下，若there be只有一个主语，谓语的数则取决于该主语的数;若有几个主语并列，则通常是与靠近的主语保持一致。如:
There is a book on the desk. 书桌上有一本书。
There were a lot of people waiting. 有许多人在等着。
There is a girl and two boys in the room. 房里有一个女孩和两个男孩。 但有时也可以与和两(几)个主语保持一致。如:
There were one or two chaps there. 那儿有一两个人。
Dalby. 除了她还有戴尔比夫妇。 In addition to her, there were Mr. and Mrs
3. Negative & Interrogative Forms of There Be(存在句的否定与疑问) 1) There be句式否定式的用法
There be句式的否定式通常应将否定词置于动词be之后:
There is not any bread left. 没有一点面包了。
There isn‘t anything I can do for you. 我帮不了你什么忙。
若谓语中包括有助动词或情态动词，通常将否定词置于助动词与情态动词之后:
There can‘t be so many mistakes. 不可能有那么多错误。
There shouldn‘t be any doubt about it. 对此不应有什么怀疑。
There haven‘t been any parties in weeks. 好几个礼拜没开过晚会了。 另外注意以下类型的否定式:
There doesn‘t seem to have been any difficulty over the money question.
在钱的问题上似乎没发生什么困难。
2) There be句式疑问式的用法
there be句式的疑问式通常应将否定词置于动词be之后:
Is there any good film on? 映什么好电影吗?
Is there room for me in the car? 车子里还有我坐的地方吗?
Are there any letters for me? 有我的信吗?
若谓语中包括有助动词或情态动词，通常将助动词或情态动词移至句首构成疑问式:
Has there been an accident? 出事了吗?
Have there been any new developments? 有什么新的发展吗?
Can there have been so much rain there,那儿会下过那么多雨吗, 另外注意以下类型的疑问式
101
Uncle Jesse, why do there have to be poor people like those? 杰西叔，为什么一定要
有他们那样的穷人?
3) There Be+…+To-Infinitive(To不定式)
There was so much to lose that we couldn‘t take any risks.
There is only one sure way to succeed. 4) There Be+…+V-ing
There is someone waiting for him.
There are two blackbirds sitting on the tree. 4. There Be and Its Similar Patterns(There be的近似句式)
There stands an ancient pagoda on that hill.
There seems something the matter with her.
There exists a world within our world.
Close Contact with Examination:(试题直击):
1. –Oh，there isn't enough _____ for us in the lift.
–It doesn't matter，let's wait for the next.
A.ground B.floor C.place D.room 2.There _____ an English Evening next Tuesday.
A.was B.will be C.will have D.are going to be 3.There _____ a football game in our school.
A.has B.will have C.will be D. have 4.There is going to _____ a report _____ Chinese history in our school this
evening.
A.have;on B.be;on C.have;for D.be;of
5.There is _____ food here.We'll have to buy some.
A.any B.some C.no D. much
6.There are _____ days in a week.
A.the seven B.seventh C.the seventh D.seven
7.There are few _____ in the fridge.Let's go and buy some peas，carrots and
cabbages.
A.vegetables B.fruit C.meat D.eggs
8.Look～There are some _____ on the floor.
A.child B.water C.boxes D.girl
9.There were two _____ people at yesterday's meeting.
A.hundreds B.hundreds of C.hundred D. hundred of
10.The letter from my uncle was short.There wasn't _____ news.
A.many B.a few C.much D.few
参考答案
1—5 D B C B C 6—10 D A C C C
Part Two: Inverted Sentences倒装句
1.Two Types of Inversion
102
按―主语+ 谓语‖ 这种顺序排列的句子是陈述语序。如果排列顺序变为―谓语( 或谓语一部分)+主语‖，就是倒装。倒装句分为:
1) Complete Inversion
将主语和谓语完全颠倒过来，叫做完全倒装 (Complete Inversion)。例如:
In a lecture hall sits a professor.
How goes the time?
Then began a bitter war between the two countries.
2) Partial Inversion
只将助动词(包括情态动词)移至主语之前，叫做部分倒装(Partial Inversion)。如果没有助动词，就需要添加上do、does、did。例如:
Did he leave a message with you? 他留话给你了吗,
Are you in favor of the plan? 你支持这个计划吗,
Not until I shouted at the top of my voice did he turn his head.
2. Points for Attention
句子结构需倒装的场合:
1)疑问句。如:
Are you from here?
Who is that speaking?
2)祝愿句。如:
Long live peace!
May you succeed!
So be it(就这样吧。
3)某些感叹句。如:
There goes the bell(打铃了。
Here comes the bus!
Judith，how lovely are you! [注]由副词there和here引导的倒装感叹句不可用人称代词，如不可说 Here comes he! 而须说Here he comes! 4) There+be结构。如:
There lived an old man in that house(
There seems to be some misunderstanding about the matter( 5)其直接引语位于句首的陈述句。如:
―It‘s too late，‖ said Millian(
― This is the house where Shakespeare was born，‖said George( 6) 地点状语位于句首、主语为名词而谓语为不及物动词的陈述句。如:
From the window came the sound of music(
7)某些条件从句。如:
Had I the time, I would go(
Were you in my position，you would do the same(
She‘ll be sixteen come May(到5月她就16岁了。
All right，if stay you must，go and sit down properly over there( 好吧，如你必须留下，那你就在那里坐好。
103
8)某些让步从句。如:
Look as I would up and down，I could see no human being(
我尽管望上望下，还是看不到一个人。
Toil as he would，he might fall，and go down and be destroyed! 他尽管苦干，还
是可能失败、沉沦而被毁灭!
Change your mind as you will，you will gain no additional support(你即使改变主
意，也不会得到额外的援助。
9)代词so，neither，nor等副词置于句首时，全句常需倒装。如:
If you can do it，so can I(
. If you don't go，neither shall I.
I don't know，nor do I care(
10) Never，seldom，little，nor，hardly，scarcely，no sooner，not only等表否定的副词或连词位于句首时，全句需要倒装。如:
Never in my life have I seen such a thing(
Seldom have we felt as comfortable as here(
No sooner had he arrived than he fell ill.
Scarcely had he arrived when they asked him to leave again(他刚一到来，他们就又请他离去。
Not only did he hear it，but he saw it as well(
11) only位于句首并后跟状语时，全句需要倒装。如:
Only then did he understand. 只有那时，他才明白。
由only引导的从句位于句首时，主语亦应倒装。如:
Only when she came home did he learn the news(只有当她回家时他才知道这消息。
12) 主语部分较长需要后置时，全句需要倒装。如:
They erect a bronze tablet on which is carved―The Yellow River Source‖.
他们立了一面铜牌，上面写着―黄河之源‖。(on which…是倒装结构)
Sitting at her desk in deep concentration was my sister Flora(She looked as
though she had spend a sleepless night(我妹妹弗洛拉伏案沉思，好像一夜未睡似
的。(后一句意义上相等于从句)
13) 副词类搭配结构
? 某些副词+倒装结构。如:
Just then a along came Tom(就在这时，汤姆来了。
Just then in walked Isabella with a radiant face(正值此时刻，伊莎贝拉容光焕发
地走了进来。
[注]短语动词的小品词一般不可前置，如不可说Up cracked the soldier。又，上述例
句中如用人称代词则不可倒装，如必须说，In she walked。
Then did I throw myself into a chair，exhausted(这时我累得一下就坐在椅子上
了。
Only in this way can we learn English(只有这样才能学会英语。 [注]副词only后接非状语时则不可倒装。
So bright was the moon that the flowers bright as by day(皓月当空，花朵就像白
天那样鲜艳。
Crack goes the whip(啪的一声鞭子响了。
104
? 介词短语十倒装结构。如:
By his side sat his faithful dog(在他的旁边蹲着他的忠实的狗。(介词短语表地点)
Many a time as a boy have I climbed that hill(我在童年时期曾多次爬过那座山。
(介词短语表时间)
Up the valleys，down the valleys go they，saying， ―Here is a place to build a breast—work;here can you pitch a fort(((‖他们沿着山谷走上走下，说着，―这
里是筑胸墙的地方，这里可以修一堡垒……‖(介词短语表方向)
With it was mingled far-away cheering(远处的欢呼声与此融在一起。(介词短语
表伴随)
? 表示否定的词语十倒装结构。如:
Nor once did he talk to me( 他一次也没有和我谈过。
Never did he speak about his own merits(他从不讲他自己的功绩。
Seldom has a devoted teacher been so splendidly rewarded(一位忠诚的教师很
少受到如此好的报答。
Hardly had he arrived when she started complaining(他一到家，她就抱怨起来。
Little did I think that we were talking together for the last time(我没有想到我们
这次谈话竟成诀别。
No sooner had he arrived than he went away again(他刚到家就又走了。
Not only did they present a musical performance，but they also gave a brief
introduction to the history of Western brass instruments(他们不但做了音乐表
演，而且简短地介绍了西方铜管乐器的历史。
[注]但不是所有以not开头的句子都必须倒装，如下面的句子即可不倒装:
Not a soul was to be seen(一个人也看不见。
Not that I know of(就我所知不是这样。
Close Contact with Examination:(试题直击):
1) Not only ____ this machine but ____ it.
A. can he run……can he repair B. can he run……he can repair
C. he can run……he can repair D. he can run……can he repair
2) ____, it is quite easy to drill a hole in it with laser.
A. Hard although the diamond B. Hard as the diamond is
C. As the diamond is hard D. Has hard is the diamond 3) Only in this way ____ to improve the situation there.
A. can you hope B. you can hope C. hope can D. you hope 4) Why can't I smoke here,At no time___ in the meeting-room
A. is smoking permitted B. smoking is permitted
C. smoking is it permitted D. does smoking permit 5) Not until the early years of the 19th century ___ what heat is.
A. man did know B. man know C. didn't man know D. did man know
6) No sooner___ than it began to rain heavily.
A. the game began B. has the game begun
C. did the game begin D. had the game begun
105
7) –Do you know Jim quarreled with his brother
–I don't know, _____.
A. nor don't I care B. nor do I care C. I don't care neither D. I don't care
also
8) Seldom ______ TV during the day.
A. they watch B. are they watching C. have they watched D. do they
watch
9) __________ his appearance that no one could recognize him.
A. Strange so was B. So strange was C. Was so strange D. So was strange
10) On the wall _______ two large portraits.
A. are hanging B. hanged C. hang D. hangs 11) A fish needs water and without water it will die._______.
A. So does a man B. So will a man C. So it is with a man D. So is it with a man
参考答案
1—5 B B A A D 6—11 D B D B A C
Part Three: Subject-Verb Agreement(主谓一致)
1. Three Guiding Principles
Subject-Verb Agreement consists mainly three basic guiding principles: grammatical
concord, notional concord and principle of proximity.
主谓一致，指的是句子的主语和谓语在人称和数上的一致。主谓一致可分为语法一
致、意义一致和就近一致。
1) Grammatical Concord
语法一致原则:指主语是单数形式，谓语动词用单数形式，主语是复数形式，谓语
也用复数形式。例如:Tom is a good student. 汤姆是个好学生。
They often play football on the playground. 他们经常在操场上踢足球。
2) Notional Concord
意义一致:指主语形式上为单数，但意义为复数，因此谓语动词用复数形式;或主
语形式上为复数，但表示单数意义，这是谓语动词用单数形式。例如:
My family are having lunch now. 我们一家人现在正吃午饭。
Twenty dollars is too expensive for the book. 这本书20美元太贵了。
3) Principle of Proximity
就近原则: 谓语动词该用单数还是复数形式，取决于最邻近它的名词、代词或其它词
的数。另外，neither...nor，either...or，not only...but also...连接两个名词或代词作主
语时，或由there，here引导的句子，并且主语不止一个时，谓语动词通常与邻近它
的那个主语保持数上一致。例如:
Not only the teacher but also his students like playing football.
不仅老师喜欢踢足球，而且他的学生也喜欢踢足球。
There is a pen and some books on the desk. 课桌上有一支钢笔和一些书。
2. Points for Attention
1) 单数名词(代词)，不可数名词作主语时，谓语用单数形式，复数名词(代词)作主语，
106
谓语用复数形式。例如:
The desk is Tom‘s. 这张桌子是汤姆的。
Some water is in the bottle. 一些水在瓶子里。
The students are playing football on the playground. 这些学生正在操场上踢足球。
2) many a+单数名词作主语，意义虽为―许多‖，但谓语要用单数形式。例如:
Many a student has been to Shanghai. 许多学生到过上海。
3) more than one+单数名词作主语，谓语用单数。例如:
More than one student has ever been to Beijing. 不止一个学生曾经去过北京。 4) 表示时间，价格，重量，数目，长度，数学运算等的词或短语作主语时，这些通常作一个整体概念，谓语用单数形式。例如:
Two months is a long holiday. 两个月是一个长假。
Twenty pounds isn‘t so heavy. 2 0英镑并不太重。
Ten miles isn‘t a long distance. 1 0英里并不是一段很长的距离。
Five minus four is one. 5减4等于1。
5) 主语是each/every+单数名词+and(each/every)+单数名词时，谓语动词用单数。例如:
Each boy and each girl has got a seat. 每个男孩和女孩都有一个座位。
Every man and every woman is at work. 每个男人和女人都在工作。 6) one and a half+复数名词作主语，谓语动词用单数形式。例如:
One and a half hours is enough. 一个半小时足够了。
7) 动词不定式，动名词作主语时，谓语动词用单数形式。例如:
To see is to believe 眼见为实。
Doing eye exercises is good for your eyes. 做眼睛保健操对你的眼睛十分有益。 8) a/an+单数名词+or two 作主语，谓语动词用单数。例如:
A student or two has failed the exam. 一两个学生考试不及格。 9) 当主语部分含有with，together with，along with，as well as，besides，except，but，like等介词或介词短语时，谓语动词用单数形式。例如:
Mike with his father has been to England. 迈克同他的父亲去过英格兰。
Mike,like his brother,enjoys playing football. 迈克像他的哥哥一样喜欢踢足球。 10) 由and连接的两个单数名词作主语时，一般用复数形式，但and所连接的并列主语是同一个人，事物，或概念时，谓语动词用单数。这两种情况区分如下:a/the+单数名词+and+单数名词，指的是同一个人或物;a/the+单数名词+and+a/the+单数名词，指两个人或物。例如:
The writer and teacher is coming. 那位作家兼教师来了。(作家和教师指同一个人)
The writer and the teacher are coming. 作家和老师来了。(作家和老师是两个人) 11) people,police等集体名词作主语，谓语动词用复数形式，family,class,group,team
等集体名词作主语，若指一个整体时，谓语动词用单数形式，若指一个具体成员时，谓语动词复数形式。例如:
People here are very friendly. 这儿的人很友好。
His family isn‘t large. 他家的人不多。
My family all like watching TV. 我们一家人都喜欢看电视。 12) 不定代词
107
somebody,someone,something,anybody,anything,everybody,everyone,everything,nob
ody,no one,nothing作主语，谓语动词用单数，例如:
Is everyone here today. 今天大家到齐了吗,
Something is wrong with him. 他有毛病。
Nobody was in. 没有人在家。
13) each,either,neither,another,the other 作主语，谓语动词用单数。例如:
Each of them has an English dictionary. 他们每人都有一本英语词典。
Neither answer is correct. 两个答案都不正确。
14) 以—s 结尾的名词本身不表示复数意义，谓语通常用单数形式，如news,maths,physics等，例如:
No news is good news. 没有消息就是好消息。
Maths is very popular in our class 在我们班数学很受欢迎。
15) 由both…and…连接两个单数名词作主语时，谓语动词用复数形式;由or,either…or…，neither…nor…,not only…but also…,not…but…,连接两个名词或代词作主语时，根据就近原则决定谓语动词形式。例如:
Both his father and his mother are both teachers. 他的爸爸和妈妈都是老师。
Tom or Jack is wrong. 不是汤姆就是杰克错了。
Either this one or that one is Okay. 这一个或那一个都行。
16) a number of+复数名词作主语，谓语动词用复数;the number of +复数名词作主语，谓语动词用单数。例如:
A number of famous people were invited to party. 许多名人都被邀请参加这个聚会。
The number of the students is over eight hundred. 我们学校的学生数超过800人。
17) 当kind of,pair of, glass of 等表示确定数量的名词短语修饰主语时，谓语与kind,pair,glass等一致。例如:
This pair of shoes is Tom‘s. 这双鞋是汤姆的。
There are two glasses of water on the table. 桌上有两杯水。
18. the+形容词表示一类人时，谓语动词用复数形式，表示抽象概念时，用单数形式。例如:
The poor are very happy,but the rich are sad. 穷人很快乐，富人却过得不快乐。
The beautiful lives forever. 美是永存的。
19) 以here，there开关的句子，若主语在两个或两个以上，谓语动词通常与临近的主语一致。例如:
There is a book and three pens on the desk. 桌子上有一本书，三只钢笔。
Here are some books and paper for you. 这是给你的书和纸。
Close Contact with Examination:(试题直击):
1. Either Jane or Steven _______ watching TV now.
A. were B. is C. was D. are
2. Two days ________enough for me to finish the work, I need a third day.
A. isn‘t B. is C. aren‘t D. are 3. —How many lessons do you usually have a day?
108
—Six lessons a day. And each of then ________45 minutes.
A. last B. lasts C. have D. are
4. Neither Lu nor I _________ a basketball player.
A. am B. is C. be D. are
5. There __________ many new words in lesson one,It is very easy.
A. is B. aren‘t C. isn‘t D. are
6. The number of the students in our school ________1200.
A. is B. are C. has D. have
7. Maths _________ my favorite subject.
A. be B. is C. am D. are
8. The boy with the two dogs _________ when the earthquake rocked the city.
A. were sleeping B. is sleeping C. was sleeping D. are asleep 9. Every one except Tom and John ________there when the meeting began.
A. are B. is C. were D. was
10. That place is not interesting at all, ________ of us wants to go there.
A. Neither B. Both C. All D. Some
11. Nobody but Jane ________ the secret.
A. know B. knows C. have know D. is
12. —What‘s on the plate? some eggs and cakes on it?
—There ________some eggs and cakes on it.
A. is B. are C. was D. were
13. This pair of glasses _______ mine.
A. are B. be C. is D. will be
14. Both Lily and Lucy ______ to the party yesterday.
A. invited B. was invited C. had invited D. were invited 15. —Two months _______ quite a long time.
—Yes, I‘m afraid that he will miss lots of his lessons.
A. is B. are C. was D. were
16. In the city the old _______.
A. take good care of B. are taken good care of
C. is taken good care of D. are been taken good care of 17. His family ______ all very kind and friendly, His family _______ a happy one.
A. are,is B. is,is C. are,are D. is,are
18. The singer and the dancer __________ come to Beijing.
A. has B. have C. are D. is
19. The children in this class each __________ a new school bag.
A. have B. has C. has got D. are having
20. All but one __________ here just now.
A. is B. was C. has been D. were
参考答案
1—5 BABAB 2—10 ABCDA 11—15 BBCBA 16—20 BABAD
Unit Fourteen: Five Patterns and Thirty-eight Variants
109
(五大句型结构及其三十八种变体)
相关语法术语提示:
S: 主语， V:动词/谓语动词， Adv:副词，Adv. Phrase:副词短语Adj:形容词 Complement:补足语，O:即Object，宾语， OC:宾语补足语，Be-V:be动词， Noun:名词， Pronoun:代词， Vi:不及物动词，Vt:及物动词，Prep:介词， Half-linking Verb:半系动词，To-Infinitive:to不定式，Zero-Infinitive:不带to的不定式，Indirect Object:间接宾语(即宾语指人)，Direct Object:直接宾语(即宾语指物)，Clause:从句、子句，Objective Complement:宾语补足语
Pattern One: S. +Vi.
1) S.+Vi.
e.g. Birds sing
2) S.+Vi.+Adv./Adv.Phrase
e.g. Birds sing merrily in the tree. 3) S.+Vi.+To-Infinitive
e.g. John has gone to buy books. More examples:
1)If anything gains in quantity, it must lose in quality.
2)Do not pay dear for your whistle. 3)It pays to be polite.
4)Man alone can speak.
5)He studied with might and main not to fail in the examination.
Pattern Two: S.+Vi.+ Complement 1) S.+Be-V.+ Noun
e.g. Promise is debt.
2) S. +Be-V.+Pronoun
e.g. The choice is yours.
3) S.+Be-V.+Adjective
e.g. These shoes are too tight. 4) S.+Be-V.+To-Infinitive
e.g. I am to start tomorrow.
5) S.+Be-V.+-ed Adjective+ To-Infinitive e.g. I am pleased to meet you. 6) S. +Half-Linking Verb+Noun e.g. Childhood has become a memory. 7) S.+Half-Linking Verb+Adjective e.g. He looked healthy and good-tempered. 8) S.+ Vi.+-ing
e.g. The boy came running.
9) S+Vi.+-ed
e.g. You look so excited, what's in your mind?
e.g. He went home exhausted.
110
10) S.+Vi.+Prep.+-ing
e.g. Cold as it was, they went on working.
11) S.+Vi.+Adjective+To-Infinitive
e.g. He felt very happy to see me elected. e.g. It remains much to be done.
12) S.+Vi.+Adjective +that(if, whether, when, why,etc.)Clause
e.g. Are you sure if (whether) John is going with us? e.g. He looked blank, when he was informed of his dismissal.
attern Three: S.+ V+O P
1) S.+Vt.+Noun
e.g. I keep a diary every day.
2) S.+Vt.+Pronoun
e.g. They know us very well.
3) S.+Vt.+-ing
e.g. I like playing tennis.
e.g. I do not advise your seeing him at this time. 4) S.+Vt.+Prep.+-ing
e.g. She insists on going to the movies. e.g. Mrs. Smith objected to our riding across the lawn. 5) S.+Vt.+To-Infinitive
e.g. He does not plan to harm you.
6) S.+Vt.+what(whom,which)+To-Infinitive e.g. I don‘t know what to do.
e.g. Do you know which way to take?
7) S.+Vt.+how(when, where)+To-Infinitive e.g. We must decide when to start.
e.g. She will show where to sit.
8) S.+Vt.+that Clause
e.g. I hear that the play is worth seeing. 9) S.+Vt.+what(who,whom,which)Clause
e.g. She knows what your name is.
e.g. I can not see which way is better.
10) S.+Vt.+how(when,where,why)Clause
e.g. The public begin wondering if there is more to the story. e.g. No one knows for sure how people first learned to preserve food.
11) S.+Vt.+if(whether)Clause
e.g. Let me see if I can think of something else pleasant. e.g. Could you go and check if the baby's asleep?
Pattern Four:S.+V+Indirect O.+Direct O.
1) S.+Vt.+Noun(Pronoun)+Noun
e.g. I have bought you a present.
e.g. Would you please pass me the green marker?
111
2) S.+Vt.+Noun(Pronoun)+how(when,where,what,which)+To-Infinitive e.g. Please show me where to find them.
e.g. I cannot tell you when I will come for sure. 3)S.+Vt.+Noun(Pronoun)+that(what,which,who,how,when,where,why,if,whether)Clause
e.g. He asked me what was the right way
e.g. Will you ask him if(whether) he is coming with us?
Pattern Five: S.+Vt.+O+Objective Complement
1) S.+Vt.+Noun1(Pronoun1)+Noun(Pronoun)
e.g. I thought him an honest man.
2) S.+Vt.+Noun(Pronoun)+Adjective
e.g. Try not to make me angry(I don't want to do something I might regret(
3) S.+Vt.+Noun(Pronoun)+-ing
e.g. Was Bill late for work this morning?I saw him running like mad for the bus 4) S.+Vt.+Noun(Pronoun)+-ed
e.g. His answer somewhat made them disappointed.
5) S.+Vt.+Noun(Pronoun)+To-Infinitive
e.g. I want you to knock off for the day and go home and sleep on this and think it over
well.
6) S.+Vt.+Noun(Pronoun)+Zero-Infinitive
e.g. No one can make you feel inferior without your consent. 7) S.+Vt.+Noun1(Pronoun)+as+Adjective(Noun)
e.g. You must consider those matters as a whole.
8) S.+Vt.+Noun1(Pronoun)+Prep+Noun
e.g. You must put everything in order immediately. e.g. If you go on drinking like this you'll make yourself ill. e.g. You have mistaken me for someone else .
9) S.+Vt.+Noun(Pronoun)+Clause
e.g. ―Call it what you like,‖ said the Cat. ―Do you play croquet with the Queen to-day?‖
e.g. He has made the company what it is today.
Unit Fifteen Pitfalls To Be Aware of(易错陷阱简说)
一、名词、冠词
1. – What can I do for you?
–I‘d like two _______.
A. box of apple B. boxes of apples C. box of apples D. boxes of apple 答案: B. (选择其它三项的同学要注意仔细看题.不要马虎, 这里box 和apple都是可
数名词)
2. Help yourself to _________.
A. some chickens B. a chicken C. some chicken D. any chicken 答案: C (选择A的同学要注意chicken当鸡肉讲时不可数)
3. ________ it is today!
112
A. What fine weather B. What a fine weather C. How a fine weather D.
How fine a weather
答案: A. (选择B的同学要注意weather不可数. 选择C和D的同学要注意weather
是名词, 要用what来感叹.)
4. Which is the way to the __________?
A. shoe factory B. shoes factory C. shoe‘s factory D. shoes‘ factory
答案: A. (选择D的同学注意这里不是指名词所有格, 而是名词作形容词的用法.类似
的用法如: pencil box; school bag等.)
5. This class ________ now. Miss Gao teaches them.
A. are studying B. is studying C. be studying D. studying 答案: A. (选择B的同学要注意, 当这种概念名词当 ―人‖讲的时候要做复数处理.类
似的还有: the police are running after the thief等)
6. We will have a _________ holiday after the exam.
A. two month B. two-month C. two month‘s D. two-months
答案: B (选择C的同学要注意应用two months‘; 选择D的同学要注意名词之间有
―– ― 后的组合词当作形容词来用, 因此就不用所有格形式了.)
7.________ trees are cut down in the forests every year.
A. Thousand B. Thousands C. Thousand of D. Thousands of 答案: D. (选择C的同学注意词组记忆的准确性)
8. Our sports meeting will be held ________.
A. on 24, Tuesday, April B. in April 24, Tuesday C. on Tuesday, April 24 D. in
April Tuesday 24
答案: C. (选B的同学是受到中文的影响,要特别注意中英文的差异)
9_________ people here are very friendly to us.
A. The B. / C. A D. An
答案: A. (选择B的同学要注意这里的people是特指这里的, 因此要用定冠词the)
10. There is no enough ________ in the corner to put the table.
A. place B. room C. floor D. ground
答案:B (根据句意知道，这里表示没有地方放桌子。选A的同学要注意place表示
地点，是可数名词)
二、代词
11. Some people like to stay at home, but ________ like to go to the cinema.
A. another B. other C. others D. other one 答案: C. (选择B的同学要牢记: some…., others….)
12. – Is this your shoe?
–Yes, but where is _________?
A. the other one B. other one C. another one D. the others 答案: A. (选择C的同学要注意鞋是两只, another指的是三者或者三者以上)
13.– When shall we meet again next week?
–_______ day is possible. It‘s no problem with me.
A. Either B. Neither C. Every D. Any
答案: D. (选择C的同学要注意every指的是每一天都见面, any指的是任何一天都可
以.注意中文的干扰)
113
14.Have you ever seen ________ big panda before?
A. a such B. such a C. so a D. a so 答案: B (选择A的同学要注意词组记忆的准确性)
15. – _______ do you write to your parents?
– Once a month.
A. How long B. How soon C. How often D. How far 答案: C. ( 选择A的同学要注意中文的干扰. 由回答知道这里指的是写信的频率, 用
how often表示.)
16. Robert has gone to _________ city and he‘ll be back in a week.
A. other B. the other C. another D. any other 答案:C (选择其它三项的同学要注意，这里没有说只有两座城市，因此不能用.)
17.– A latest magazine, please.
– Only one left. Would you like to have ________? A. it B. one C. this D. that
答案:A (选择B的同学要注意这里指的是上一句中提到的那本杂志，不能用表示
泛指的不定代词one )
18.– Which book would you like to borrow?
–________ of the two books is OK with me.
A. Either B. Both C. Any D. None 案:A (选择B的同学要注意is 表示单数.) 答
19.He knows______ English _____ French. But he‘s very good at Japanese.
A. either; or B. both; and C. neither; nor D. either; nor
答案:C (选择A和B的同学要注意语境.)
20.– What do your parents do?
– One is a teacher; _________ is a driver.
A. other B. another C. the other D. that one 答案: C (选择其它三个选项的同学要注意, one is …, the other is …的用法)
21. Mrs. Lee teaches ________ math. We all like her.
A. we B. us C. our D. ours
答案: B (选择C的同学要注意, teach +人+科目, 而不能用teach +某人的+ 科目)
22. There are many trees on ________ side of the street.
A. either B. any C. all D. both
答案:A (选择D的同学要注意side为单数。选择B的同学要注意:街道只有两边，
因此不能用any)
23.________ is the population of the city?
A. How many B. What C. How many people D. How much 答案:B (在问到人口是多少时，其实是在说―人口数是什么‖，因此不能用A，要注
意排除中文的干扰。)
三、介词、连词
24. Japan is ________ the east of China.
A. in B. to C. on D. at
答案: B ( in 表示在范围里的, on表示紧挨着的; to 表示在范围以外的)
25. The postman shouted, ― Mr Green, here is a letter ________ you.‖
114
A. to B. from C. for D. of 答案: C ( 选择A的同学要注意to 表示动作的方向, for表示有从属关系或者利益关系)
26. We can‘t do it ________ your help.
A. with B. of C. under D. without 答案: D. (选择C的同学要注意中文的干扰, 借助某人的帮助要用with,反之用
without)
27. He hasn‘t heard from his friend __________ last month.
A. since B. by the end of C. for D. until 答案: A (选择B的同学要注意B选项为过去完成时的时间;选择C的同学要注意, for+时间段; 选择D的同学要注意不是not…until 句型.until + 句子)
28. I didn‘t buy the dictionary yesterday _________ my aunt would give me one.
A. until B. because C. if D. before 答案: B (选择A的同学要注意语境)
29. I‘m going to look for another job ________ the company offers me more
money.
A. after B. unless C. when D. for 答案: B ( 选择其它三项的同学要注意语境, 这里是指除非公司给我更多工资,否则我就要找其它工作.)
30. Don‘t hurry. The bus won‘t start ________ everybody gets on.
A. since B. as C. until D. when 答案: C (选择D的同学要注意前面是否定.)
31. Please show me _________ to send an e-mail, John. It‘s the first time for me to do it.
A. how B. what C. when D. where 答案:A (选择C的同学要注意认真看题，这里的time不是时间，而是指第一次) 32. You‘ve passed the exam. I‘m happy ______ you.
A. on B. at C. in D. for 答案:D (选择A的同学要注意记忆词组的准确性.)
33. I wonder ________ they finished so many different jobs in such a short time.
A. why B. how C. when D. where 答案:B (选择A的同学要注意语境，这里指他们怎么能在如此短的时间里完成如此多的困难的工作.)
34. – Do you speak English?
– Yes, I speak _________ a little English _______ some French.
A. neither, not B. both, or C. either, or D. not only, but also
答案:D (选择C的同学要注意语境.)
35. ______ the maths problem is difficult, I‘ll try very hard to work it out.
A. Though B. When C. Before D. After 答案:A (选择B的同学要注意语境.不能说当题目难的时候，我将努力.而是说尽管题目难，但我将努力解决.)
36. The accident took place ________ a cold February evening.
A. on B. in C. at D. for 答案:A (选择B的同学要注意，在特指的早上、下午、晚上，不用in要用on)
115
37. He turned ________ the radio because his father was asleep.
A. on B. down C. up D. over 答案:B (根据语境:他爸爸睡着了，因此不能用A-打开，也不能用C-调大.D表示
反过来)
38. I don‘t know the homework _______ today.
A. on B. in C. of D. for
答案:D (选择C的同学要注意of表示从属关系，要注意中文的干扰.)
39. – Oh, it‘s raining heavily.
–Please don‘t leave ________ it stops.
A. when B. after C. since D. until 答案: D (选择其它选项的同学要注意读懂句子, 只有把语境搞清楚才能答对问题.)
40. Jane said she would come here ________ 9:00 and 9:30 tomorrow morning.
A. from B. at C. between D. around 答案: C (选择B的同学没有把体看完整; 选择A的同学没有注意到from…to…的搭
配.)
四、动词
41. My father went to Shanghai yesterday. He ______ back in two weeks.
A. comes B. has come C. will come D. came 答案: C ( 选择D的同学要注意in +时间段, 表示在未来的一段时间,应用将来时)
42. It‘s spring now. The students ________ trees these weeks.
A. plant B. are planting C. will plant D. planted 答案: B (选择A的同学要注意 these weeks 并不表示经常做某事,而是强调这几个星
期同学们一直在种树.)
43. – __________ you ________ your book to the library?
– Yes. I returned it yesterday.
A. Did, return B. Have, returned C. Will, return D. Do, return
答案: B ( 选择A的同学过分注意回答用了一般过去时, 但在上一句中, 并没有给出
过去的时间,强调你现在是否还书了, 应用现在完成时.)
44.– Must I finish it now?
–No, you ________.
A. mustn‘t B. needn‘t C. can‘t D. shouldn‘t
答案: B (选择A的同学要注意mustn‘t意思指不允许, needn‘t指的是不必要.)
45. Though it‘s cloudy now, it _________ get sunny later.
A. can B. may C. must D. need
答案: B ( 选C的同学要注意语境, 这里强调过些时候也许会晴天, 表示推测性.)
46. It is in the library, you _______ talk loudly.
A. may not B. can‘t C. needn‘t D. mustn‘t
答案: D ( 选择B的同学要注意中文的干扰.can‘t表示不能够。)
47. If anyone wants to say something in class, you ________ put up your hands
first.
A. must B. may C. should D. can
答案: A ( 选其他三个选项的同学要注意语境，anyone暗示出语气。表明是一个规定，
而不是建议。)
116
48.– I called you last night but no one answered the phone.
–I ________ dinner with my friends in the restaurant.
A. have B. had C. was having D. have had 答案:C (选择B和D的同学要注意分析语境.这里指我当时正在和朋友在饭馆吃饭.)
49. If you have lost a library book, you have to _________ it.
A. find out B. look after C. pay for D. take care 答案:C (选择A的同学要注意语境)
50. He will call me as soon as he _________ the city.
A. reaches B. reached C. will reach D. is reaching 答案:A (选择B的同学要注意主将从先)
51. The pen _________ him ten yuan.
A. paid B. cost C. took D. spent
答案:B (选择C的同学要注意took通常用在时间上;选择A和D的同学要注意，
这里的主语是物品，因此不能用paid 和spent)
52. The train _________ for twenty minutes.
A. left B. has left C. is leaving D. has been away 答案:D (选择B的同学要注意，当用完成时表示持续动作时，要选择可持续动词，
不要用瞬间动词.)
53. – How many books _____ they ________?
Five. But they haven‘t finished reading even one. –
A. did…borrow B. had…borrowed C. will…borrow D. do…borrow
答案:A (选择B的同学要注意，这里只是问过去发生的一件事，并不是过去时间
之前发生的.)
54. He _________ his bike so he has to walk there.
A. lost B. has lost C. had lost D. loses 答案:B (选择A的同学注意句子并没出现两个时间点，因此要注意时态的前后一
致.)
55. – Why did the policeman stop us?
–He told us not _______ so fast in this street.
A. drive B. driving C. to drive D. drove 答案:C (这里考查的是tell sb. not to do sth.)
五、形容词、副词
56. The population of the world in 20th century became very much _________ than
that in 19th.
A. bigger B. larger C. greater D. more 答案: B (选择其它三项的同学要注意population的固定搭配是large)
57. Miss Li is one of _______ in our school.
A. a popular teacher B. more popular teacher
C. most popular teacher D. the most popular teachers 答案:D.(选择其它三项的同学要注意one of + 复数的用法.)
58. The magazines are ________ easy that the children can read them well.
A. such B. so C. too D. very
答案: B (选择A的同学要注意easy是形容词，要用so…that, 而不用such…that)
59.– Would you like ________ more tea?
117
–Thank you. I‘ve had ________.
A. any, much B. some, enough C. some, much D. any, enough 答案:C (选择B的同学要注意enough是形容词，不能说had enough)
60. I think basketball is _______. I like to watch it.
A. boring B. bored C. exciting D. excited 答案:C (选择D的同学要注意basketball本身很令人激动，excited表示被什么所感
染而激动。)
61. This dinner looks _______ to me, and I like it.
A. terrible B. good C. badly D. nicely 答案:B (选择D的同学要注意look在这里是系动词，后面要加形容词。)
62. The math problem is so hard that ________ students can work it out.
A. a few B. a little C. many D. few
答案:D (选择A、C的同学要注意语境，这里指没有什么学生能做出来。)
63.– What‘s the weather like tomorrow?
–The radio says it is going to be even ______.
A. bad B. worst C. badly D. worse 答案:D (选择A的同学要注意，even，比较级)
64. Though she talks ______, she has made ________ friends here.
A. a little, a few B. little, few C. little, a few D. few, a few
(选择A的同学要注意语境，这里指虽然她不怎么说话，但她有一些朋友.) 答案:C
65. He never does his work _______ Mary.
A. as careful as B. so careful as C. as carefully as D. carefully as
答案:C (选择A和B的同学要注意work 是行为动词，要用副词来修饰.)
六、句法
66. If it ________ tomorrow we‘ll go to the park.
A. will not rain B. doesn‘t rain C. is not raining D. didn‘t rain
答案: B (选择A的同学要注意if引导的条件状语从句主句用将来时, 从句用一般现
在时.)
67. The radio says the snow ______ late in the day.
A. stops B. will stop C. has stopped D. stopped 答案: B. (选择A的同学要注意语境, late in the day表示 ―晚些时候‖, 要用将来时)
68. The nurse told the children the sun ______ in the east.
A. rises B. rose C. will rise D. has risen 答案: A ( 选择B的同学要注意, 虽然主句中用了told, 但太阳从东方升起是真理性
事实, 应用一般现在时表示.)
69.– Are you sure you have to? It‘s been very late.
–I don‘t know ______ I can do it if not now.
A. where B. why C. when D. how
答案: C ( 选择D的同学要注意语境, 根据语境知道这里强调的是必须先在做,否则就
没有时间了)
70. –Could you tell me _______ she is looking for?
–Her cousin, Susan.
A. that B. whose C. whom D. which
答案: C (选择其它三项的同学要注意语境,这里是指找Susan这个人)
118
71.– When are the Shutes leaving for New York?
–Pardon?
– I asked ___________.
A.when are the Shutes leaving for New York B.when the Shutes are leaving for
New York
C.when were the Shutes leaving for New York D.when the Shutes were leaving
for New York
答案: D ( 选择B的同学注意到了宾语从句的语序,但同时要注意时态要用相应的过
去时.)
72. Would you please tell me ________ next, Mr Wang?
A. what should we do B. we should do what C. what we should do D.
should do what
答案: C ( 选择A的同学要注意宾语从句的语序为陈述语序.)
73. Mr. King didn‘t know _______ yesterday evening.
A. when does his son come back B. when his son comes back
C. when did his son come home D. when his son came home 答案: D ( 选择C的同学要注意考虑宾语从句的陈述语序)
74. Alice has gone to the classroom and she didn‘t say ________.
A. when did she come back C. when would she be back
C. when she came back D. when she would be back 答案:D (选择C的同学要注意语境，这里要用过去将来时.)
75.– I‘m sorry I broke your coffee cup. – Oh, really? _________.
A. It doesn‘t matter B. I don‘t know C. it‘s OK with me D. You‘re welcome
答案:A (选择C和D的同学要注意中文的干扰.D是用来回答别人的致谢的.)
76.– Would you mind calling me back tomorrow again? –_________.
A. Not at all B. You‘re welcome C. You‘re right D. Nice to meet you
答案:A (同62题)
77. He hardly had anything to eat, ________ he?
A. didn‘t B. hadn‘t C. had D. did
答案:D (选择A的同学要注意hardly表示否定;选择B和C的同学要注意，反意
疑问句要用心。)
中考初中英语总复习易错题易错点易混点集锦
1.Because he was ill yesterday, so he didn‘t go to work. (×)
Because he was ill yesterday, he didn‘t go to work. (?)
He was ill yesterday, so he didn‘t go to work. (?)
[析] 用though, but表示―虽然……，但是…… ‖或用because, so 表示―因为……，所
以……‖时，though和but 及because和so 都只能择一而用，不能两者同时使用。
2.The Smiths have moved Beijing. (×)
The Smiths have moved to Beijing. (?)
[析] 不及物动词后接名词或代词作宾语时，要在动词之后加上适当的介词;但不及
119
物动词后接home, here, there等副词作宾语时，动词之后不必加任何介词。 3.The box is too heavy for him to carry it. (×)
The box is too heavy for him to carry. (?)
[析] the box既是这句话的主语, 也是不定式to carry的逻辑宾语，若句末再加上it，就和the box重复了。
4.Each of the boys have a pen. (×) Each of the boys has a pen. (?)
[析] 复数名词前有表个体的each of, one of, every，either of等词组修饰，或有表否定的neither of, none of 等词组修饰时，谓语动词要用单数形式。 5.例:那是你心软～我不就是一个例子吗,
Neither he nor you is good at English. (×) Neither he nor you are good at English. (?)
[析] either... or..., neither... nor..., not only..., but also... 等词组连接句子的两个主语时，谓语动词遵循―就近一致原则‖, 即由靠近谓语的那个主语决定谓语的人称和数用何种形式。
6.Ten minus three are seven. (×) Ten minus three is seven. (?)
[析] 用英语表示加(plus)、减(minus)等数学运算时，谓语动词也用单数形式。 7.The number of the workers in this factory are about 5,000. (×)
The number of the workers in this factory is about 5,000. (?)
[析] the number of表示―……的数量‖，谓语动词用单数形式;a number of 的意思是―若干‖或―许多‖，相当于some或a lot of，和复数名词连用，谓语动词用复数形式。 8. 例. Hello! I have important something to tell you. (×)
Hello! I have something important to tell you. (?)
[析] 形容词或动词不定式修饰不定代词作定语时，修饰成分要置于不定代词之后。 9. His son is enough old to go to school. (×)
His son is old enough to go to school. (?)
[析] enough作形容词修饰名词时，可以放在名词前，也可放在名词后;作副词修饰形容词或副词时，只能放在形容词或副词之后。
10.. Here is your sweater, put away it.(×)
Here is your sweater, put it away. (?)
[析] put away, pick up, put on等―动词+副词‖构成的词组后接代词作宾语时，代词只能放在动词和副词之间。
11. Look! Here the bus comes.(×)
Look! Here comes the bus.(?)
[析] 在以here, there引起的陈述句中，若句子的主语是名词，要用倒装语序，即用―Here /There+动词+名词‖结构;但主语若是代词时，则不用倒装语序, 即用―Here/There +代词+动词‖结构。
12. I do well in playing football, _______. (我妹妹也行。)A. so my sister does(×)B. so does my sister(?)
Li Lei is really a football fan. --- _______. (确实这样.) A. So is he(×) B. So he is
(?)
[析] ―so+be动词/助动词+主语‖的倒装结构表示前面所述情况也适用于后者，意为―……也是这样‖;―so+主语+be动词/助动词‖的陈述结构表示对前述情况的肯定，意
120
为―……确实如此‖。
13.重庆比中国的其他城市都大。
Chongqing is larger than any city in China. (×)Chongqing is larger than any other
city in China. (?)
[析] ―any city in China‖包括了重庆这座城市, 同一事物自己与自己不能做比较，只
有在city 前加上other才能表示重庆和中国的其它城市比较大小。
The weather in Guangzhou is warmer than Beijing. (×) The weather in Guangzhou is warmer than that in Beijing . (?)
[析] 表示比较时，句子中的两个比较对象必须一致，不同的比较对象不能做比较。
错误句的比较对象分别为the weather in Guangzhou和Beijing，这两个不同类的事
物之间不能做比较。
14, His sister married with a teacher last summer.(×)His sister married a teacher last
summer. (?)
[析] 表达―A和B结婚‖，要用A married/will marry B。这时务必要避免受汉语影
响使用A married/will marry with B。
15. 例There is going to have a film tonight. (×) There is going to be a film tonight. (?)
[析] 一般将来时用在 There be 句式中时，be going to或will之后的动词原形只能
用be,也就是说要用There is (are) going to be.... / There will be....。
16. 例I‘ll go hiking if it won‘t rain next Sunday. (×)I‘ll go hiking if it doesn‘t rain
next Sunday.(?)
[析] 习惯上在含有时间状语从句和条件状语从句的复合句中，如果主句的谓语动词
用了一般将来时，从句的谓语动词要用一般现在时表示将来的动作。
17.例 Teacher told us yesterday that the earth went around the sun. (×)
Teacher told us yesterday that the earth goes around the sun. (?)
[析] 习惯上在含有宾语从句的复合句中，主句的谓语动词用了一般过去时，从句的
谓语动词要用过去的某种时态。但如果从句表述的是一客观事实或客观真理时，则
不受主句时态的影响，而用一般现在时。
18. All the balls are not round. 翻译成汉语:
所有的球都不是圆的。(×)并不是所有的球都是圆的。(?)
[析] all, every, both等词和not连用时，not通常放在all, every, both的后面，一般情
况下表示部分否定，意为―并非……都……‖。
19. 例--- He didn‘t go to school yesterday, did he?-- _______, though he didn‘t feel very well.
A. No, he didn‘t (×) B. Yes, he did (?)
例--- Don‘t you usually come to school by bike?-- _______. But I sometimes walk. A. No, I don‘t (×) B. Yes, I do (?)
[析] 习惯上英语中的yes意为―是的‖，no意为―不‖，但在―前否后肯‖的反意疑问句
或否定疑问句中，yes意为―不‖，no意为―是的‖。
20.---- Excuse me, is the supermarket far from here,---- No，it's about _______.
A. 7 minutes walk B. 7 minute walk C. 7 minutes' walk D. 7 minute's walk
答案为C。本题考查名词所有格用法。当名词的复数以-s结尾时，则只需要加―'‖即
可，则―7分钟的距离‖为―7 minutes' walk‖。
21. You can not imagine how much I ______ on this dress. Is it beautiful,
A. paid B. took C. cost D. spent
121
[剖析] 答案为D。本题考察四个表―花费‖的动词辨析。主语为人，且和介词on搭配
的动词是spend。
22. ---- Do you know _____ university student who is talking with Joe,---- Yes， she，
s my cousin, Kate.
A. a B. an C. the D. /
[剖析] 答案为C。university虽然以元音字母u开头，但其前若使用不定冠词时，则
要用a.不过此题中不能使用不定冠词，而是特指和Joe说话的那个大学生，故要选
the。
23. The number of giant pandas is getting ______ because their living areas are
becoming farmlands.
A. less and less B. larger and larger C. smaller and smaller D. fewer and
fewer
[剖析] 答案为C。句意为―大熊猫的数量越来越少因为他们的生存空间正逐渐变成农
场‖。本题中四个选项都是―比较级+ and + 比较级‖的结构，表示―越来越……‖。主
语为number，只能和large或small搭配。而结合句意可判断答案为C。
24. Be careful when you come _______ the street，because the traffic is very busy at the moment.A. across B. behind C. between D. over [剖析] 答案为A。本题考察方位介词的用法。―过马路‖一般为表面横穿，因此要用
across。
Yes, our classroom ______ every day. 25. ---- Do you often clean your classroom,----
A. clean B. cleans C. is cleaned D. Cleaned [剖析] 答案为C。句中有every day，主语为our classroom，故要用一般现在时的被
动语态。
26. Lucy usually cleans the cage every two days. (对画线部分提问)_ _______ Lucy usually clean the cage,
[剖析] 答案为How often does。对every two days提问要用how often。
27. I didn't understand __________，so I raised my hand to ask...
A. what my teacher says B. what does my teacher say C. what my teacher said D. what did my teacher say
[剖析] 答案为C。本题为宾语从句，由于需要用陈述语序可排除B、D;另外，主句
时态为一般过去时，则从句也要用对应的过去时态，故还可排除A。
28. ---- How much ______ the shoes, ---- Five dollars ______ enough.
A. is;is B. are;is C. are;are D. is;are
[剖析] 答案为B。shoes作主语时，谓语动词应用复数形式;five dollars是一个整体，
应按单数对待。
29. 误〕 We got to the top of the mountain in daybreak.
〔正〕 We got to the top of the mountain at day break. 〔析〕 at用于具体时刻之前，如:sunrise, midday, noon, sunset, midnight, night。 30. 〔误〕 Don‘t sleep at daytime
〔正〕 Don‘t sleep in daytime.
〔析〕 in 要用于较长的一段时间之内，如:in the morning / afternoon, 或 in the week / month / year. 或 in spring / supper /autumn / winter等等。
31. 〔误〕 He became a writer at his twenties.
〔正〕 He became a writer in his twenties
122
〔析〕这句话应译为:他在20多岁时就成了作家。在某人的一段生活时间段中要用
介词in来表示，而在具体岁数时用at来表示。
32. 误〕 We went to swim in the river in a very hot day.
〔正〕 We went to swim in the river on a very hot day. 〔析〕 具体某一天要用介词on, 又如:on New Years Day
33. 〔误〕 I‘m looking forward to seeing you on Christmas.
〔正〕 I‘m looking forward to seeing you at Christmas. 〔析〕在节日的当天用on，而全部节日期间用at,Christmas是圣诞节期间，一般要
有两周或更长的时间。
34. 误 I haven't see you during the summer holidays. 正 I haven't seen you since the beginning of the summer holidays. 〔析〕 during表示在某一段时间之内，所以
一般不与完成时搭配，如:I visited a lot of museums during the holiday. 而for表示
一段时间，可以用于完成时，如:I haven't see you for a long time. 而through 用来
表示时间时则为"整整，全部的时间"。如:It rained through the night.而since则是
表达主句动作的起始时间，一般要与完成时连用。
35. 〔误〕 At entering the classroom, I heard the good news.
〔正〕 On entering the classroom, I heard the good news. 〔析〕 On 加动名词表示"一……就"。本句的译文应是:我一进入教室就听见这个
好消息了。又如:on hearing… 一听见， on arrival 一到达就……(on表示动作的
名词)
36. 〔误〕 In the beginning of the book, there are some interesting stories. 〔正〕 At
the beginning of the book, there are some interesting stories. 〔析〕 at the beginning与at the end都是指某事物的开始与结束部分，均不指时间范围，而in the beginning 则是指开始一段时间。in the end,at last是指"最终，终于"之意。
37. 〔误〕 Till the end of next week. I will have finished this work.
〔正〕 By the end of next week. I will have finished this work. 〔析〕 by 引起
的时间状语表示了动作的截止点，其意思为"不迟于某一时刻将工作做完"，所以主
句一般是完成时态。当然可以有将来时态，如:Ill be there by five o‘clock.而till则
表达其一动作一直持续到某一时刻，但句中的动词一定要用持续性动词，而瞬间的
截止性动词应用其否定句式，如:I won‘t finish this work till(until) next weekend. 38. 〔误〕 He came to London before last weekend.
〔正〕 He had come to London before last weekend. 〔正〕 He came to London two weeks ago. 〔析〕 before 一般要与完成时连用，而
ago则与一般过去时连用。
39. 〔误〕I have studied English for three years since I had come here.
〔正〕 I have studied English for three years since I came here. 析 since用来
表达主句动作的开始时间，所以其引出的从句中应为过去时，而不能用完成时态
40. 〔误〕 I can help you repair this bike. You will get it after two hours.
〔正〕 I can help you repair this bike. You will get it in two hours. 〔析〕中文经
常讲两小时之后来取，两天内会修好，而这个介词在英文中要用in而不要用after。
其原因有二，?after 多用于过去时，如:I arrived in New York. After three days, I found a job in the bank. ? after 加时间是表达一个不确定的时间范围，如:after
three days, 即三天之后的哪一天都可以。所以在许诺若干时间内会完成某事时，一
定要用介词in。
123
41.误〕 Three days after he died. 正〕 After three days he died. 〔正〕 Three days
later he died.
〔析〕 after 与 later都可以用来表达一段时间之后，但它们所处的位置不同，after
在时间词前，而later在时间词后。
42.〔误〕 She hid herself after the tree. 〔正〕 She hid herself behind the tree. 〔析〕 after多用来表达某动作之后，所以有的语法书中称它为动态介词，如:I run
after him. After finishing my homework, I went to see a film. 而behind则多用于静态
事物之后。
43.〔误〕 There is a beautiful bird on the tree. 正〕 There is a beautiful bird in the tree.
〔析〕 树上长出的果实，树叶要用on, 而其他外来的人、物体均要用in the tree. 44.〔误〕 Shanghai is on the east of China. 〔正〕 Shanghai is in the east of China. 〔析〕 在表达地理位置时有3个介词:in, on, to。 in表示在某范围之内; on表示与
某地区接壤;to则表示不相接。如:Japan is to the east of China.
45.〔误〕 I arrived at New York on July 2nd. 〔正〕 I arrived in New York on July 2nd. 〔析〕 at用来表达较小的地方，而in用来表达较大的地方。at常用于at the school gate, at home, at a bus stop, at the station, at the cinema, at a small village。
46.〔误〕 He lived in No. 3 Beijing Road. 〔正〕 He lived at No. 3 Beijing Road. 〔析〕 在门牌号码前要用at, 并要注意它的惯用法:at the end of the street, at the foot of the mountain, at the top of the page。
47.〔误〕 There is a colour TV set at the corner of the hall. 〔正〕 There is a colour TV set in the corner of the hall.
〔析〕 在屋内的角落应用in，而墙的外角用at，如:There is a tree at the corner of the street.
48. 〔误〕 Do you know there is some good news on today‘s newspaper? 〔正〕 Do
you know there is some good news in today‘s newspaper? 〔析〕 在报纸上的新闻要
用in, 而在具体某一版上，或某一页上则要用on。
49. 〔误〕 The school will begin on September 1st.
〔正〕 School will begin on September 1st.
〔析〕这里的school应看作不可数名词泛指学校的课程，即开学之意。要注意，有
些活动场所当表达正在从事该种活动时不要加冠词，如:at table (吃饭)， When I
came to Toms home, they were at table. 还有: at desk (学习)，at work (工作) at
school (上学)， in hospital (住医院) at church 作礼拜如加上定冠词则另有他意，如:
at the school 即在学校工作或办事，in the hospital 即在医院工作或去看望病人。
50. 〔误〕 Ill leave Beijing to Shanghai tomorrow. 〔正〕 I‘ll leave Beijing for Shanghai. 〔正〕 I‘ll leave for Shanghai.
〔析〕 leave for 是离开某地去某处的固定搭配，不可将for改为别的介词。这样的
搭配还有:start for 动身前往某处，set out for， sail for。
51. 〔误〕 I‘m sorry. I have to get out the bus at next stop.
〔正〕 I‘m sorry. I have to get out of the bus at next stop. 〔析〕 get in, 与 get out是两个相反的词组。get in 为上车，而get out为下车，但
语法家认为这里的in与out为副词，所以其后不能接名词，我们可以讲Wed better get in. 或Wed better get out. 还有一组词组有关上下车:get on,off(a train, a ship, a struck) get into,out of (a car, taxi…)
124
52. 〔误〕 Be careful The temperature of the water is ninety degrees over zero.
〔正〕 Be careful. The temperature of the water is ninety degrees above zero.
〔析〕 over 与 above 在作为比某物高的意思时有时可以互换。但在垂直方向上的
高矮时，即正上方时则要用above.而泛指上方时用over.
53.〔误〕 The Dead Sea is under the sea level. 〔正〕 The Dead Sea is below the sea level.
〔析〕在垂直下方要用below.也就是讲above与below互为反意词，over与under
也是反意词。
54. 〔误〕 There is a big tree in the front of the house. 〔正〕 There is a big tree in front of the house.
in front of 是在物体外部的前面，而in the front of 是在物体内部的前面，如:The
driver sits in the front of the bus.
55.〔误〕 It took them two days to walk across the forest. 〔正〕 It took them two days to walk through the forest.
〔析〕 across 作为介词有两个主要意思:? 横过，如:I want to walk across the street.? 对面，如:There is a post office across the street,而through 多用于三维空
间中的穿越。across则多用于平面上的横过。如:The little girl ran across the room to meet her mother.
56. 〔误〕 The sun sets toward the west. 〔正〕 The sun sets in the west. 〔析〕 towards也可用作toward，它主要表达朝向某方向运动，但不一定到达，如:
He ran toward(s) the mountain.而在表示方位east, west, north, south 时，其前面要
用in。要注意的是这4个词可以用作副词，如:I went south. 也可用作名词，如:I
went to the south.也可用作形容词，如:I went to the south part of China. 57. 〔误〕 Can I write the exam paper with ink? 〔正〕 Can I write the exam paper
正〕 Can I write the exam paper in ink? 〔析〕 with后要加拿得起with a pen? 〔
来放得下的工具，而墨水、颜料等原料则要用in。
58. 〔误〕 I‘m earlier today. I came here by his car. 〔正〕 I‘m earlier today. I came here in his car.
〔析〕在交通工具前加介词by，但不能再有任何指示代词或冠词，否则要改换相应
的介词。by taxi=in a taxi
by train=in a train by bicycle=on a bicycle by ship=on a ship
59. 〔误〕 A lot of French wines are made of grape. 〔正〕 A lot of French wines are made from grape.
〔析〕 made of 是指由原材料到成品过程中原材料未发生质地的变化，而发生了某
种变化则要用from,如:The desk was made of hard wood. 60.〔误〕 This is a good dictionary in English grammar. 〔正〕 This is a good dictionary on English grammar.
〔析〕关于某方面的书籍、报告等有两个介词，其中on表示某专业用书，about则
为某方面的普通读物，如:This is a book about physics.即物理科普知识。
61.〔误〕 Do you have the key of the door. 〔正〕 Do you have the key to the door. 〔析〕 key to the door门的钥匙。相同用法还有answer to the question, entrance to the highway, danger to health.千万不要用of。
62. 〔误〕 I didn‘t do my homework, so the teacher was angry to me. 〔正〕 I didn‘t
do my homework, so the teacher was angry with me. 〔析〕 be angry with其后接人，
125
而be angry at其后接事。如:He was angry at what she said. 63. 〔误〕 He was good for skating. 〔正〕 He was good at skating. 〔析〕 be good at 为"擅长某事"，而be good for somebody为对某人很好。
64. 〔误〕 It was good to you to help my little boy. 〔正〕 It was good of you to help my little boy.
〔析〕 这句话应译为:你真太好了，帮助了我的小孩。而be good to somebody 是
对某人态度好。如:Her mother is good to everyone.
65. 〔误〕 My parents were very pleased at me. 〔正〕 My parents were very pleased with me. 〔正〕 My parents were very pleased at my studying. 〔析〕 be pleased with后加somebody, 而be pleased at后加something。
66. 〔误〕 He is agree with me. 〔正〕 He agrees with me. 〔误〕 He againsts me. 〔正〕 He is against me.
〔析〕同意agree为动词，而反对against则为介词。在使用中一定要注意。
67. 〔误〕 I haven't heard letters from him. 〔正〕 I haven't heard from him. 〔析〕
hear from 即为:从某人处得到信件。不要再加letter了。
68. 〔误〕 Do you know the girl on white? 〔正〕 Do you know the girl in white? 〔析〕 in white为穿一身白。与in有关的词组有:in bed(睡觉)，in hospital(住院)，
in a hurry(匆匆忙忙)，in danger(危险中),in joy (高兴)，in good health(身体好)，in
love(恋爱)，in trouble(困境)，与之相反的是out of ,如:out of trouble (摆脱困境)，
out of date(过时了)， out of order(出故障)
69. 〔误〕 She didn't come to school because of she was ill. 〔正〕 She didn't come to school because she was ill.
〔析〕 because of 后接名词，如:The game was put off because of the rain. 70. . What can I do for you?- I‘d like two ____ A. box of apple B. boxes of apples C. box of apples D. boxes of apple
答案: B. (选择其它三项的同学要注意仔细看题.不要马虎, 这里box 和apple都
是可数名词)
72.Help yourself to _________. A. some chickens B. a chicken C. some chicken D. any chicken
答案: C (选择A的同学要注意chicken当鸡肉讲时不可数)
73. Which is the way to the __________?A. shoe factory B. shoes factory C. shoe‘s
factory D. shoes‘ factory
答案: A. (选择D的同学注意这里不是指名词所有格, 而是名词作形容词的用法.
类似的用法如: pencil box; school bag等.)
.This class ________ now. Miss Gao teaches them.A. are studying B. is studying C.
be studying D. studying
答案: A. (选择B的同学要注意, 当这种概念名词当 ―人‖讲的时候要做复数处理.
类似的还有: the police are running after the thief等)
We will have a _________ holiday after the exam.A. two month B. two-month C. two
month‘s D. two-months
答案: B (选择C的同学要注意应用two months‘; 选择D的同学要注意名词之间有
―— ― 后的组合词当作形容词来用, 因此就不用所有格形式了.)
74. 8.Our sports meeting will be held ________.A. on 24, Tuesday, April B. in April 24,
Tuesday C. on Tuesday, April 24 D. in April Tuesday 24答案: C. (选B的同学是受
126
到中文的影响,要特别注意中英文的差异)
75. Some people like to stay at home, but ________ like to go to the cinema.A. another
B. other C. others D. other one
答案: C. (选择B的同学要牢记: some…., others….)
76. -- Is this your shoe?-- Yes, but where is _________?A. the other one B. other one
C. another one D. the others
答案: A. (选择C的同学要注意鞋是两只, another指的是三者或者三者以上)
77. – When shall we meet again next week?-- _______ day is possible. It‘s no problem with me.
A. Either B. Neither C. Every D. Any
答案: D. (选择C的同学要注意every指的是每一天都见面, any指的是任何一天都可
以.注意中文的干扰)
78. 1 _______ do you write to your parents?-- Once a month.A. How long B. How
soon C. How often D. How far
答案: C. ( 选择A的同学要注意中文的干扰. 由回答知道这里指的是写信的频率, 用
how often表示.)
79..Robert has gone to _________ city and he‘ll be back in a week. A. other B. the
other C. another D. any other
答案:C (选择其它三项的同学要注意，这里没有说只有两座城市，因此不能用.)
80. – Which book would you like to borrow?-- ________ of the two books is OK with
me.
A. Either B. Both C. Any D. None 答案:A (选择B的同学要注意is 表示单
数.)
81. .He knows _________ English ________ French. But he‘s very good at Japanese.
A. either; or B. both; and C. neither; nor D. either; nor答案:C (选择A和B
的同学要注意语境.)
82. – What do your parents do?-- One is a teacher; _________ is a driver.A. other B.
another C. the other D. that one
答案: C (选择其它三个选项的同学要注意, one is …, the other is …的用法)
83. 22.There are many trees on ________ side of the street .A. either B. any C. all D. both
答案:A (选择D的同学要注意side为单数。选择B的同学要注意:街道只有两边，
因此不能用any)
84. ________ is the population of the city?
A. How many B. What C. How many people D. How much 答案:B (在问到人口是多少时，其实是在说―人口数是什么‖，因此不能用A，要注
意排除中文的干扰。)
85. .Japan is ________ the east of China.A. in B. to C. on D. at 答案: B ( in 表示在范围里的, on表示紧挨着的; to 表示在范围以外的)
87. The postman shouted, ― Mr Green, here is a letter ________ you.‖
A. to B. from C. for D. of
答案: C ( 选择A的同学要注意to 表示动作的方向, for表示有从属关系或者利益关
系)
88. We can‘t do it ________ your help.A. with B. of C. under D. without
127
答案: D. (选择C的同学要注意中文的干扰, 借助某人的帮助要用with,反之用without)
89. He hasn‘t heard from his friend __________ last month. A. since B. by the end of C. for D. until 答案: A (选择B的同学要注意B选项为过去完成时的时间;选择C的同学要注意, for+时间段; 选择D的同学要注意不是not…until 句型.until+ 句子)
90. I didn‘t buy the dictionary yesterday _________ my aunt would give me one. A. until B. because C. if D. before 答案: B (选择A的同学要注意语境)
91. I‘m going to look for another job ________ the company offers me more money. A. after B. unless C. when D. for 答案: B ( 选择其它三项的同学要注意语境, 这里是指除非公司给我更多工资,否则我就要找其它工作.)
92. Don‘t hurry. The bus won‘t start ________ everybody gets on. A. since B. as C. until D. when
答案: C (选择D的同学要注意前面是否定.)
93. .Please show me ____to send an e-mail, John. It‘s the first time for me to do it. A. how B. what C. when D. where
答案:A (选择C的同学要注意认真看题，这里的time不是时间，而是指第一次) 94. You‘ve passed the exam. I‘m happy ______ you.
A. on B. at C. in D. for答案:D
95. I wonder ________ they finished so many different jobs in such a short time. A. why B. how C. when D. where 答案:B (选择A的同学要注意语境，这里指他们怎么能在如此短的时间里完成如此多的困难的工作.)
96. -- Do you speak English?-- Yes, I speak _________ a little English _______ some
French.
A. neither, not B. both, or C. either, or D. not only, but also答案:D (选择C的同学要注意语境.)
97. .______ the maths problem is difficult, I‘ll try very hard to work it out. A. Though B. When C. Before D. After 答案:A (选择B的同学要注意语境.不能说当题目难的时候，我将努力.而是说尽管题目难，但我将努力解决.)
98. The accident took place ________ a cold February evening.
A. on B. in C. at D. for
答案:A (选择B的同学要注意，在特指的早上、下午、晚上，不用in要用on) 99. He turned ________ the radio because his father was asleep.
A. on B. down C. up D. over 答案:B (根据语境:他爸爸睡着了，因此不能用A-打开，也不能用C-调大.D表示反过来)
100. I don‘t know the homework _______ today. A. on B. in C. of D. for
答案:D (选择C的同学要注意of表示从属关系，要注意中文的干扰.) 101. 40.Jane said she would come here ________ 9:00 and 9:30 tomorrow morning. A. from B. at C. between D. around答案: C (选择B的同学没有把体看完整;
128
选择A的同学没有注意到from…to…的搭配.)
102. It‘s spring now. The students ________ trees these weeks.
A. plant B. are planting C. will plant D. planted 答案: B (选择A注意 these weeks 并不表示经常做某事,而是强调这几个星期同学们
一直在种树.)
103. Must I finish it now?-- No, you ________. A. mustn‘t B. needn‘t C. can‘t D. shouldn‘t 答案: B (选择A的同学要注意
mustn‘t意思指不允许, needn‘t指的是不必要.)
104. Though it‘s cloudy now, it _________ get sunny later.
A. can B. may C. must D. need
答案: B ( 选C的同学要注意语境, 这里强调过些时候也许会晴天, 表示推测性.)
105. It is in the library, you _______ talk loudly. A. may not B. can‘t C. needn‘t D. mustn‘t
答案: D ( 选择B的同学要注意中文的干扰.can‘t表示不能够。)
106. If anyone wants to say something in class, you ________ put up your hands first.
A. must B. may C. should D. can答案: A ( 选其他三个选项的同学要注意语境，
anyone暗示出语气。表明是一个规定，而不是建议。)
107. – I called you last night but no one answered the phone. -- I ________ dinner with my friends in the restaurant. A. have B. had C. was having D. have had 答案:C (选择B和D的同学要注意分析语境.这里指我当时正在和朋友在饭馆吃饭.)
108. If you have lost a library book, you have to _________ it.
A. find out B. look after C. pay for D. take care 答案:C (选择A的同学要注意语境)
109. He will call me as soon as he _________ the city. A. reaches B. reached C. will reach D. is reaching 答案:A (选择B的同学要注意主将从先)
110. The pen _________ him ten yuan.A. paid B. cost C. took D. spent
答案:B (选择C的同学要注意took通常用在时间上;选择A和D的同学要注意，
这里的主语是物品，因此不能用paid 和spent)
111. The train _________ for twenty minutes. A. left B. has left C. is leaving D. has been away 答案:D (选择B的同学要注意，当用完成时表示持续动作时，要选择可持续动词，
不要用瞬间动词.)
112. How many books _____ they ________?-- Five. But they haven‘t finished reading even one.
A. did…borrow B. had…borrowed C. will…borrow D. do…borrow
答案:A (选择B的同学要注意，这里只是问过去发生的一件事，并不是过去时间
之前发生的.)
113. He _________ his bike so he has to walk there. A. lost B. has lost C. had lost D. loses 答案:B (选择A的同学注意句子并没出现两个时间点，因此要注意时态的前后一
致.)
114. Why did the policeman stop us? -- He told us not _______ so fast in this street.
A. drive B. driving C. to drive D. drove答案:C (这里考查的是tell sb. not to
129
do sth.)
115. The population of the world in 20th century became very much _________ than
that in 19th A. bigger B. larger C. greater D. more 答案: B.(选择其它三项的同学
要注意population的固定搭配是large)
116. The magazines are ________ easy that the children can read them well.
A. such B. so C. too D. very
答案: B (选择A的同学要注意easy是形容词，要用so…that, 而不用such…that)
117. – Would you like ________ more tea?- Thank you. I‘ve had ________.
A. any, much B. some, enough C. some, much D. any, enough 答案:C (选择
B的同学要注意enough是形容词， 不能说had enough)
118. I think basketball is _______. I like to watch it. A. boring B. bored C. exciting D. excited 答案:C (选择D的同学要注意basketball本身很令人激动，excited表示被什么所
感染而激动。)
119. The math problem is so hard that ________ students can work it out.
A. a few B. a little C. many D. few
答案:D (选择A、C的同学要注意语境，这里指没有什么学生能做出来。)
120. Though she talks ______, she has made ________ friends here.
A. a little, a few B. little, few C. little, a few D. few, a few答案:C (选择A的同
学要注意语境，这里指虽然她不怎么说话，但她有一些朋友.)
121. He never does his work _______ Mary. A. as careful as B. so careful as C. as carefully as D. carefully as
答案:C (选择A和B的同学要注意work 是行为动词，要用副词来修饰.)
122. If it ________ tomorrow we‘ll go to the park.
A. will not rain B. doesn‘t rain C. is not raining D. didn‘t rain
答案: B (选择A的同学要注意if引导的条件状语从句主句用将来时, 从句用一般现
在时.)
123. The radio says the snow ______ late in the day.
A. stops B. will stop C. has stopped D. stopped 答案: B. (选择A的同学要注意语境, late in the day表示 ―晚些时候‖, 要用将来时)
124. The nurse told the children the sun ______ in the east.
A. rises B. rose C. will rise D. has risen答案: A ( 选择B的同学要注意, 虽然主
句中用了told, 但太阳从东方升起是真理性事实, 应用一般现在时表示.)
125. – Are you sure you have to? It‘s been very late.-- I don‘t know ______ I can do it if not now.
A. where B. why C. when D. how答案: C ( 选择D的同学要注意语境, 根据
语境知道这里强调的是必须先在做,否则就没有时间了)
126. 70.- Could you tell me _______ she is looking for?-- Her cousin, Susan.
A. that B. whose C. whom D. which
答案: C (选择其它三项的同学要注意语境,这里是指找Susan这个人)
127. When are the Shutes leaving for New York? -- Pardon? -- I asked
___________.
A.when are the Shutes leaving for New York B.when the Shutes are leaving for
New York
130
C.when were the Shutes leaving for New York D.when the Shutes were leaving
for New York
答案: D ( 选择B的同学注意到了宾语从句的语序,但同时要注意时态要用相应的过去时.)
128. Would you please tell me ________ next, Mr Wang?
A. what should we do B. we should do what C. what we should do D. should do
what答案: C ( 选择A的同学要注意宾语从句的语序为陈述语序.)
129. Alice has gone to the classroom and she didn‘t say ________.
A. when did she come back C. when would she be back C. when she came
back D. when she would be back
答案:D (选择C的同学要注意语境，这里要用过去将来时.)
130.I‘m sorry I broke your coffee cup.-- Oh, really? __.
A. It doesn‘t matter B. I don‘t know C. it‘s OK with me D. You‘re welcome答:A (选择C和D的要注意中文的干扰.D是用来回答别人的致谢的.)
131.He hardly had anything to eat, ________ he?A. didn‘t B. hadn‘t C. had D. did
答案:D (选择A的同学要注意hardly表示否定;选择B和C的同学要注意，反意疑问句要用助动词.)
132.He says that he won‘t be free until tomorrow.他说他到明天才会有空。 解析: 在这个复合句中, that引导的从句做says的宾语,被称为宾语从句。until用在否定句中,构成―not...until...‖ 结构,意为―直到……才……‖,谓语动词用非延续性动词;until用在肯定句中,意为―直到……‖,主句的谓语动词要用延续性动词。例如:They didn‘t leave until they finished their work. 他们完成了工作才回家。
We waited until he came. 我们一直等到他来。
133. 课本:There‘s something wrong with my computer. It doesn‘t work. 我的计算机出了故障,它无法工作了。
真题再现:I have to speak to my grandpa loudly because there‘s _____ with his
ears.
A. wrong something B. something wrong C. anything wrong D. nothing
wrong
要点点拨:形容词修饰something, nothing, anything, everything等不定代词时要后置,故排除A。答案:B
134.课本原句:All the computers must be shut down when you leave. 离开时你必须把所有的计算机关掉。
真题:The whole company _____ for a three weeks‘ summer holiday. A. shut down B. shut off C. shut up D. shut away要点点拨:shut down意为―关闭;停工;歇业‖;shut off意为―关掉(煤气)‖等;shut up意为―关闭;住嘴‖等;shut away意为―隔离;隔绝‖。答案:A
135. Our sports meeting has been ____ till next Monday because of the bad weather.
A. put on B. put up C. put off D. put down要点点拨: put on意为―穿上,上演‖;put up意为―举起,挂起,张贴‖;put off意为―推迟,延期‖; put down意为―放下,写下,记下‖。 答案:C
136. So it goes on, hour after hour. 就这样继续下去,一小时接一小时。解析: hour after hour意思为―一小时接一小时‖。英语中,用after连接两个相同的单数名词(名词前不用冠词)表示―一个接一个‖
131
137. 解析: during(in, for) the last(past) + 一段时间,表示―到现在为止多长时间以来
(内)‖,常与现在完成时态连用。例如:In the last twenty years China has changed a lot. 在最近二十年内中国发生了巨大的变化。
138. I‘m afraid I won‘t come ___B___ 7 and 9. I will be at work then. A. until B. between C. during D. for
139..Butter and cheese _C_____ in price. A. has gone up B. is gone up C. have gone up D. are gone up
140.Today some newly-produced mobile phones can take pictures __B____ a camera. A. as B. for C. like D. of
141.The buses _____C__ over 2 thousand people a day.
A. take B. bring C. carry D. sent
142.The conductor kept ___D____ hot water to us. A. give B. bring C. taking D. giving
143.There are four pairs of socks to ______, but the woman doesn‘t know ______ to buy.(A)
A. choose from; which B. choose from; what C. choose; which D. choose ;what 144.Nobody noticed the thief slip into the shop, because the lights happened to ___D____.
A. put out B. turn out a C .give out D. go out
Yes, it all depends on the weather. 145.___A___ the sports meeting might be put off.
A.I‘ ve been told B. I‘ve told C. I‘m told D.I told
146.The teacher said ___A___ wanted to go to the cinema must be there before 6:00, A. those who B. that C. who D. which
147.They stopped ______ and ______ out to play when they ______ the bell ring or rest.(A)
A. working; went; heard B. work; to go; hear C. working; go; hearing D. working; going; heard
148.I am going to Qingdao and stay there for a week.(B)
______ you are there, would you please buy some books for me? A. If B. While C. Since D. As soon as
149. 1 John plays football ____, if not better than, David. A as well B as well as C so
well D so well as
解析:该题意为:John踢足球如果不比David好的话，那也踢得和David一样好。
和…一样好为as well as. 故该题正确答案为B。
150. She thought I was talking about her daughter, ____, in fact, I was talking about my daughter.A when B where C which D while解析:该处意为"然而"，只有while
有此意思，故选D。
151. I learned that her father ____ in 1950.A had died B died C dead D is dead
解析:该题正确答案为,。从句中的谓语动词动作虽然发生在主句谓语动词的动
作之前，但因从句中有明确的过去时间状语in 1950, 所以不用过去完成时态，而用
一般过去时态。
152. The five-year-old girl ____ by her parents.
A is looked B has looked for C is being looked for D has been looked解析:该题正
确答案为,。在带有介词的动词短语用于被动语态句中，介词不能省，否则就变成
132
了不及物动词短语，而不能用于被动语态的句子中。
153. We had hoped that he ____ longer.A stays B have stayed C stayed D would stay
解析:该题正确答案为,。had hoped表示"本希望"，同样用法的动词还有think,
expect等，后面的句子需用虚拟语气
154. "Mary wants to see you today"."I would rather she ____ tomorrow than today."
A comes B came C should come D will come解析:该题正确答案为,。would rather后面的从句需用虚拟语气，用动词过去时表示。
155. It is wise to have some money ____ for old age. A put away B kept up C given away D laid up
解析:该题正确答案为,。意为"存";keep up意为"继续";give away意为"分发
";lay up"
156. She says she doesn't feel like ____ out with you. A going B to go C for going D went
解析:该题正确答案为A。 feel like = want, 此处like 为介词，后面要接名词或
动名词作宾语
157. _______ if he had any bad habit, she replied that he was a heavy smoker.A. Ask
B. To ask C. Asked D. Asking解析:该题答案为C。主语she是被问。
158. They _______ to walk in the street at might. A. didn't dare B. not dared
C. not dare D. dared not
解析，该题答案为A， 此空需选一动词作谓语，因为后面是to walk, didn't dare是行为动词dare过去时态的否定形式。
159. When he was very old, Mr. Smith _______ sit for hours without saying a word.
A. would B. should C. must D. used解析，该题答案为A, would此处表过去
的倾向性，习惯性动作，意为"总是"如: When we were children, we would go swimming every summer.
160. Don't forget to post the letter, _______ ? A. will you B. do you C. won't
you D. shall you
解析:该题答案为A， 在否定句、祈使句后只用"will you"?，但肯定的祈使句后
可用如，Wait for me, will (won't, can, can't, could) you? 161.He hardly writes to you, _______ ?A. doesn't he B. does he C. do they D.
has he
解析:该题答案为B，hardly否定副词，反问部分要用肯定形式。
162. _______ I accept the gift or refuse it is none of your business. A. If B.
Whether C. Even if D. No matter when解析:该题答案为B。whether可以和
or连用，if不可以，此外if一般仅用于宾语从句。
163. The way _______ these comrades look at problems is wrong. A. where B. in
that C.X D. with which解析:该题答案为C，先行词是way，定语从句中用that
或 in which来引导或不填。
164. ____a long time since I saw you last time.A(It was B. It is C. It had been
D. It can be
解析:该题答案为B，It is +时间数+ since引导的从句是一个句型，意为"从…时
候以来过了多久了。"
165. The chemical works _______ where my father has worked for thirty years in
1949.
133
A. was built B. were built C. is built D. are built 解析:该题答案为A。works形式
上是复数，意思上是单数，因此谓语动词用单数，类似的还有news, maths, politics,
physics.
166.They each _______ a copy of the new physics. A. have B. has C. having D. gets
解析:该题答案为A。They each不等于each of …, each of 这个词组作主语谓语
用单数如each of the students hands in their homework，而they each作主语，谓语
要随each前面的词来变化。
167.Not only ____ this machine but ____ it. A. can he run……can he repair B.
can he run……he can repair
C. he can run……he can repair D. he can run……can he repair
解析:该题答案为B，在not only……but (also)句型中，只有but前面的部分倒装，
but后面仍是正常语序。
168.____ that he went to sleep.A It was until midnight B That was until midnight
C It was not until midnight D That was not until midnight解析:该题答案为C。
强调until结构时，要将否定词not移到until前。又如:He didn't leave until twelve
改为It was not until twelve that he left.
169. There are a lot of students ____ in the class room.A talk B talking C
talked D to talk
解析:该题正确答案为B。 There be句型为倒装句，可换为A lot of students are
talking in the class room. 又如:There is a lot of noise heard out in the street. 170. While ____my homework, I heard a cry for help.A do B did C doing D having done
解析:该题答案为C。该空处省略了I'm,相当于while I'm doing my home work.
如:While playing guitar, he is singing.
171. The bus ____C__ on the road for 2 hours so far. A. has stopped B. stopped C. has been
Are you __A___ the jacket these days? A. wearing B. putting on C. dressing D. on
He __C______ foe 2 hours. A. got up B. has got up C. has been up You mustn't ___B_____ until he comes back. A. be away B. leave C. be left 172. —These farmers have been to the United States. —Really , When
_____ there ,
A. will they go B. did they go C. do they go D. have they gone 现在完成时与
一般过去时容易混淆，就是因为它们所表示的动作都发生在过去，但二者又有区别:
一般过去时表示过去某个时间发生的事、存在的状态或经常发生的 动作，说话的侧
重点在于陈述一件过去的事情，与现在没有关系;现在完成时表示与现在有关系的
发生在过去的动作，它不与表示过去的时间状语(如 yesterday ， last week ，
a moment ago等)连用。故9的正确答案为B.
173. His father ______ the Party since 1978.A. joined B. has joined C. was
in D. has been in 现在完成时中，非延续性动词不能与for和since引导的表
示一段时间的状语连用，通常是用相应的延续性动词来代替。故11的正确答案依次
为:D.
174. You must make your new house clean and safe __C_____you move in.
134
A.because B.when C.before D.until
I was_______tired_______I couldn't walk
on.(A)A.so…that B.too…to C.very…that D.very…to
I thought he___D____to see his mother if he time. A.will go…has B.will go …will have C.would go …would have D.would go …had
175. Today the forests have almost gone. People must ___C____ down too many trees.
A. stop from cutting B. stop to cut C. be stopped from cutting D. be stopped to cut
176.It's very nice _________ you to get me two tickets _________ the World Cup.(B)
A. for， of B. of， for C. to， for D. of， to
177. My mother was very glad __A____ her old friend.A. to meet B. meet C. met D.
meets
:be +形容词+ to do sth:结构中的不定式作状语，常表示原因或方式。
178. . The panda is so fat that it can't go through the hole.(改为意思相同的句子)
The hole ______ ______ ______ ______ such a fat panda to go through.( is， too，
small， for)
:too +形容词/副词(for sb)to do…:(太……而不能……)和:enough (for sb) to
do…:(足以、足够……做……)结构中，不定式作结果状语。
179. The new hospital ___ D ___ is near the factory. A. build B. builds C. to build D. to be built当不定式的逻辑主语是不定式所表示的动作的承受者(宾语)时，用动词不
定式的被动式，即:to be +过去分词;如果不定式所表示的动作发生在谓语动词表
示的动作之前，不定式用完成式，即:to have +过去分词;如果不定式表示的动作
和谓语动词表示的动作同时发生，用不定式的进行式，即:to be +现在分词
180.________ China isn't rich now, ________we're working hard to make her richer
and stronger(B)
B. Though; / C. Both; and D. Because; so A. Though; but
so(因此; 所以)为并列连词，表示结果;because(因为)为从属连词，表示原因，但这
对因果连词在句中不可同时并用。but(可是)也为并列连词，表示转折，与之对应的
从属连词though/although (虽然)表示让步，它们也不可在句中同时使用。
181. Be careful! The water is too hot. You'd better ___C___ it right now. A. do not
drink B. not to drink C. not drink D. not drinking 【考点】 You'd better 为
You had better的缩略式。sb had better (not) do sth为一常用句型，意为―某人最好(不)
去做某事‖，请大家务必关注其否定结构。
182. We found ___A____ necessary to protect the environment. A. it B. this C.
that D. what
【考点】 ―主语+find+ it +adj. + to do sth‖为一常用句型，意为―某人发现做某
事……‖，其中it为形式宾语(此时不可用this/that/one等代词替换)，真实的宾语为
后置的不定式短语。
183..中文:从战争开始时他就一直在那里工作。(误)He has worked there since the war has begun.
(正)He has worked there since the war began.(since引导的从句表示过去的某时间
点，应用一般过去时。)
184. 中文:他去年离开家我就一直没有见过他。(误)He left home last year and I did not see him since.
(正)He left home last year and I haven\'t seen him since.(since后面省去的是he left
135
home last year，前面的句子要用完成时。)
185. 中文:我去看他们的时候他们在吃晚餐。(误)They had supper when I went to see them.
(正)They were having supper when I went to see them.(他们在吃晚餐是在过去我去
看他们的时间某一点上正进行的动作，应用过去进行时。)
中文:她两个月前去澳洲了，她许多年前到过那里。(误)She went to Australia two months ago. She has been there many years before.(正)She went to Australia two months ago. She had been there many years before.(many years before是从过去的
某时之前算起的，表示过去的过去，要和过去完成时连用。)
186.Neither he nor you is good at English.(×)Neither he nor you are good at English.(?)
析:either... or...，neither... nor...，not only...，but also...等词组连接句子的两个主语
时，谓语动词遵循―就近一致原则‖，即由靠近谓语的那个主语决定谓语的人称和数
用何种形式。
187. I can't help _____ the house this afternoon A. sweeping B. sweep C.
swept D. with sweep
B。易错选A，学生误用了短语can‘t help v-ing。但此题不是―忍不住‖之意，而是―不
能帮……‖之意。
188.The lift is used to ____ up and down every day.A. going B. went C. go D. gone
)做出的选择。但此题的C(易错选A，学生是根据短语be used to v-ing(习惯于…
be used to是被动语态，不是―习惯于…‖而是―被用来做……‖。
189. My pen ____ better than yours. I may lend it to you.A. is written B. wrote C.
writes D. is writing
C。易错选A，学生认为―物‖作主语时，应用被动语态。但此句中并不是pen―被写‖，
不能用被动形式。
190.____ my visit to France, I arrived ____Paris the first. A. At, in B. On, at C.
During, to D. In, on
B。易错选A，学生的根据是巴黎是大地方所以应用介词in。但根据此题之意，巴黎
是―我‖访问法国的第一站而非目的地。在―我‖的访问的行程中，巴黎只是旅途中的
一个―点‖，故宜用at。
191.— Could you tell them____?— Of course, she lives in Shanghai Road. (昆明市)
A. where Lily lives B. where Lily lived C. where did Lily live D. where to live
in
A。易错选B，学生一看到could，就认为应该选过去时lived。但此题是表示委婉语
气，故用一般现在时
192. He hasn't heard from his friend ____ last month. A. since B. by the end of C. for D. until A。易错选B或D。not…until，和last month应与过去的某种时态，而不是现在的
某种时态连用。
193. I didn't buy the dictionary yesterday ____ my aunt would give me one. (河南)
A. until B. because C. if D. before B。易错选A，学生只是根据固定搭配not…until来选择，而没有去理解该句的意思。
句意为因为姑姑要给我买一本，所以我不买了，是因果关系，不是时间关系。
194____ is your father?—The tall man with a pair of glasses under the tree. . A.
136
Who B. Where C. What D. Which【解析】此题陷阱选项为A或B或C。如果
不看语境把四个选项代入句中意思都很通顺。答语意为―树底下那个戴着眼镜的高个
子男人‖。由此可知问句 的意思应该为―哪一个是你父亲‖。因此正确答案为D。
195—What would you like to drink?—It doesn‘t matter. _______ will do. A. Nothing B. Everything C. Something D. Anything【解析】如果不看语境
把四个选项代入句中意思都很通。其实，这里的语境为―你想喝点什么?‖―没关系，
任何东西都行‖。正确答案为D。
196. —What is your favorite _______?—Summer. I can go swimming at that time. A. festival B. season C. month D. weather【解析】如果不看语境，四个选项代入句中
意思都很通顺。由答语可知问句所问的是最喜爱哪个季节，因此正确答案为B。
197. It‘s _______ hot _______ cold all the year round in Kunming. It‘s called ―Spring
City. ‖
A. either, or B. neither, nor C. both, and D. neither, or
【解析】此题陷阱选项为A或C。这是由于忽略语境造成的。如果不看下文中的It‘s
called ―Spring City. ‖那么从语法角度来看A、B、C三项都没有错。但在这里只有B
项才符合语境要表达的意思。正确答案为B。
198.Don‘t throw waste paper on the ground. Please _______.
A. pick them up B. pick up them C. pick it up D. pick up it
【解析】此题陷阱选项为A。这是由于忽略语境造成的，如果不注意上文中的waste
paper，就很可能误选为A。由于waste paper是不可数名词，应该用it来代替，故
正确答案为C。
199. 1. Mr Li said, ―Don‘t make such a mistake again, Tim.‖ (改为间接引语)
Mr Li told Jim ______ ______ ______ such a mistake again. not to make。直接引语为否定祈使句时，若改为间接引语，用ask / tell sb not to do sth句型，注意其中的Don‘t改成了not to，故而正确答案为:not to make.
200.Why didn‘t she pass the exam? I want to know... (改为含宾语从句的复合句)
I want to know ______ ______ ______ pass the exam why, she didn‘t。注意宾语从句的词序与陈述句的词序相同，所以要说she didn‘t。
201.Jack‘s father asked him, ―Have you packed your things?‖ (改为间接引语)
Jack‘s father asked him ______ he ______ packed his things.
if, had。将一般疑问句的直接引语改为间接引语，就是将其改为一个以if(是否)引导
的宾语从句。宾语从句要用陈述句语序，主句中的谓语动词是过去式时，宾语从句
的谓语动词也用过去式。
202.Hurry up, or you‘ll miss the early bus. (改为含条件状语从句的复合句)
______ ______ hurry, ______ ______miss the early train. If you, you will。―祈使句+and / or+陈述句‖句型中的祈使句就相当于一个if引导的
条件状语从句。注意:改写时因为前面用了连词if，后面的连词and / or要去掉。
203.This text is very difficult. I can‘t understand it. (合并为同义句)
This text is ______ difficult for me ______ understand. too, to。因为too…to…意为―太……而不能……‖正好与前面的意思相吻合。另外，
改写后的句子也可说成The text is so difficult that I can‘t understand it.
204.I know a little bit about Italy as my wife and I ____ there several years ago.
A. are going B. had been C. went D. have been 题干中前半句―know‖，一般现在时;后半句出现―several years ago‖，明显的表示过
137
去的时间，所以选择一般过去时―went‖，答案C.本题很多同学都顺着中文―去过‖而
误选了―D. have been‖，是没有掌握好语句中出现了具体过去时间这一关键。
205. The young girl sitting next to me on the plane was very nervous. She ____ before.
A. hasn‘t flown B. didn‘t fly C. hadn‘t flown D. wasn‘t flying
题干中前半句―was‖，一般过去时;后半句最后出现―before‖说明是在过去(was)
之过去，前半句的―was‖给出了选择过去完成时的时间背景，因此选择C.
206. By the time you get back， great changes ______ in this area.A.will take place B.will be taken place
C.are going to take place D.will have taken place 题干―By the time you get back‖，是―到你(将来)回来时‖，这里因为是时间状语从
句，将来时用一般时代替，因此后半句的时间应当使―将已经‖，故选择D.
207.When their first child was born, they ______ for three years. A. had married B.
had been married C. had got married D. got married [解析?]选B。这道题考察过
去完成时。看到for three years, 第一，马上想到使用完成时，排除,。第二，动作
必须是可延续性的，所以排除,、,两项。答案,。208.I was really anxious about you. You _____ home without a word. A. mustn‘t leave B. shouldn‘t have left C.
couldn‘t have left D. needn‘t leave [解析??]选B。 这道题情态动词+have
done 表示―对过去发生的事件的推测‖。shouldn‘t have done 表示―本不该做某事，
但是却做了。‖所以选B最合适。C. couldn‘t have done 表示―过去不可能发生的事‖。
209. When all the work ______, you may go back home. A. finishes B. has finished C. is finished D. will be finished
[解析]选C。考察两个语法点:第一考察主将从现，主句使用may + 动词原形，相
当于一般讲来时，从句应该使用一般现在时，所以A、C两项入围。第二考察被动
语态。Work 和finish 的关系是动宾关系，因work(工作)自己本身不能发出finish
这个动作。所以用被动语态。答案是C
210.Lucy and I are classmates. We _______ in Class One. A. all are B. are
all C. both are D. are both【解析】此题容易误选A或C。这里受到汉语
思维的影响引起的，译成汉语正好是―我们都在一班‖。表示两者都要用both，both
一般放在be动 词、情态动词或助动词之后，行为动词之前。正确答案为D。
211.If there are ______ trees, the air in our city will be _______cleaner.
A. more B. fewer C.much D. many
横线后trees是可数名词的复数形式，只能在修饰名词的复数的fewer和more中选
择，根据句意选择―更多more‖;而后面cleaner往往学生会以为是个不可数名词而
选择much，其实后面是clean个形容词，而且其后er表示它是形容词的比较级，只
有much才能修饰形容词的比较级, 故而正确答案为C。
138
浙公网安备 33021202002483